1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4: 2 * 3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar 4 * 5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions. 6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed. 7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code. 8 */ 9 10 /* 11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere 12 */ 13 14 #include "vim.h" 15 #include "version.h" 16 17 static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir)); 18 static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name)); 19 static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src)); 20 21 /* 22 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line. 23 */ 24 int 25 get_indent() 26 { 27 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 28 } 29 30 /* 31 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum". 32 */ 33 int 34 get_indent_lnum(lnum) 35 linenr_T lnum; 36 { 37 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 38 } 39 40 #if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO) 41 /* 42 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer 43 * "buf". 44 */ 45 int 46 get_indent_buf(buf, lnum) 47 buf_T *buf; 48 linenr_T lnum; 49 { 50 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts); 51 } 52 #endif 53 54 /* 55 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with 56 * 'tabstop' at "ts" 57 */ 58 int 59 get_indent_str(ptr, ts) 60 char_u *ptr; 61 int ts; 62 { 63 int count = 0; 64 65 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr) 66 { 67 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */ 68 count += ts - (count % ts); 69 else if (*ptr == ' ') 70 ++count; /* count a space for one */ 71 else 72 break; 73 } 74 return count; 75 } 76 77 /* 78 * Set the indent of the current line. 79 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line. 80 * Caller must take care of undo. 81 * "flags": 82 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed. 83 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line. 84 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it. 85 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed. 86 */ 87 int 88 set_indent(size, flags) 89 int size; /* measured in spaces */ 90 int flags; 91 { 92 char_u *p; 93 char_u *newline; 94 char_u *oldline; 95 char_u *s; 96 int todo; 97 int ind_len; /* measured in characters */ 98 int line_len; 99 int doit = FALSE; 100 int ind_done = 0; /* measured in spaces */ 101 int tab_pad; 102 int retval = FALSE; 103 int orig_char_len = -1; /* number of initial whitespace chars when 104 'et' and 'pi' are both set */ 105 106 /* 107 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of 108 * characters needed for the indent. 109 */ 110 todo = size; 111 ind_len = 0; 112 p = oldline = ml_get_curline(); 113 114 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it 115 * isn't already set */ 116 117 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs; if both 'expandtab' and 118 * 'preserveindent' are set count the number of characters at the 119 * beginning of the line to be copied */ 120 if (!curbuf->b_p_et || (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)) 121 { 122 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of 123 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */ 124 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi) 125 { 126 ind_done = 0; 127 128 /* count as many characters as we can use */ 129 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p)) 130 { 131 if (*p == TAB) 132 { 133 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 134 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 135 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 136 if (todo < tab_pad) 137 break; 138 todo -= tab_pad; 139 ++ind_len; 140 ind_done += tab_pad; 141 } 142 else 143 { 144 --todo; 145 ++ind_len; 146 ++ind_done; 147 } 148 ++p; 149 } 150 151 /* Set initial number of whitespace chars to copy if we are 152 * preserving indent but expandtab is set */ 153 if (curbuf->b_p_et) 154 orig_char_len = ind_len; 155 156 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 157 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 158 if (todo >= tab_pad && orig_char_len == -1) 159 { 160 doit = TRUE; 161 todo -= tab_pad; 162 ++ind_len; 163 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */ 164 } 165 } 166 167 /* count tabs required for indent */ 168 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 169 { 170 if (*p != TAB) 171 doit = TRUE; 172 else 173 ++p; 174 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 175 ++ind_len; 176 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */ 177 } 178 } 179 /* count spaces required for indent */ 180 while (todo > 0) 181 { 182 if (*p != ' ') 183 doit = TRUE; 184 else 185 ++p; 186 --todo; 187 ++ind_len; 188 /* ++ind_done; */ 189 } 190 191 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */ 192 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT)) 193 return FALSE; 194 195 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */ 196 if (flags & SIN_INSERT) 197 p = oldline; 198 else 199 p = skipwhite(p); 200 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1; 201 202 /* If 'preserveindent' and 'expandtab' are both set keep the original 203 * characters and allocate accordingly. We will fill the rest with spaces 204 * after the if (!curbuf->b_p_et) below. */ 205 if (orig_char_len != -1) 206 { 207 newline = alloc(orig_char_len + size - ind_done + line_len); 208 if (newline == NULL) 209 return FALSE; 210 todo = size - ind_done; 211 ind_len = orig_char_len + todo; /* Set total length of indent in 212 * characters, which may have been 213 * undercounted until now */ 214 p = oldline; 215 s = newline; 216 while (orig_char_len > 0) 217 { 218 *s++ = *p++; 219 orig_char_len--; 220 } 221 222 /* Skip over any additional white space (useful when newindent is less 223 * than old) */ 224 while (vim_iswhite(*p)) 225 ++p; 226 227 } 228 else 229 { 230 todo = size; 231 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len); 232 if (newline == NULL) 233 return FALSE; 234 s = newline; 235 } 236 237 /* Put the characters in the new line. */ 238 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */ 239 if (!curbuf->b_p_et) 240 { 241 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of 242 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */ 243 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi) 244 { 245 p = oldline; 246 ind_done = 0; 247 248 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p)) 249 { 250 if (*p == TAB) 251 { 252 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 253 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 254 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 255 if (todo < tab_pad) 256 break; 257 todo -= tab_pad; 258 ind_done += tab_pad; 259 } 260 else 261 { 262 --todo; 263 ++ind_done; 264 } 265 *s++ = *p++; 266 } 267 268 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 269 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 270 if (todo >= tab_pad) 271 { 272 *s++ = TAB; 273 todo -= tab_pad; 274 } 275 276 p = skipwhite(p); 277 } 278 279 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 280 { 281 *s++ = TAB; 282 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 283 } 284 } 285 while (todo > 0) 286 { 287 *s++ = ' '; 288 --todo; 289 } 290 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len); 291 292 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */ 293 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK) 294 { 295 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE); 296 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED) 297 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0); 298 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */ 299 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum 300 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline)) 301 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (colnr_T)(p - oldline); 302 retval = TRUE; 303 } 304 else 305 vim_free(newline); 306 307 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len; 308 return retval; 309 } 310 311 /* 312 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size) 313 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line. 314 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed. 315 */ 316 static int 317 copy_indent(size, src) 318 int size; 319 char_u *src; 320 { 321 char_u *p = NULL; 322 char_u *line = NULL; 323 char_u *s; 324 int todo; 325 int ind_len; 326 int line_len = 0; 327 int tab_pad; 328 int ind_done; 329 int round; 330 331 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent 332 * Round 2: copy the characters. */ 333 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round) 334 { 335 todo = size; 336 ind_len = 0; 337 ind_done = 0; 338 s = src; 339 340 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */ 341 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s)) 342 { 343 if (*s == TAB) 344 { 345 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 346 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 347 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 348 if (todo < tab_pad) 349 break; 350 todo -= tab_pad; 351 ind_done += tab_pad; 352 } 353 else 354 { 355 --todo; 356 ++ind_done; 357 } 358 ++ind_len; 359 if (p != NULL) 360 *p++ = *s; 361 ++s; 362 } 363 364 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 365 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 366 if (todo >= tab_pad) 367 { 368 todo -= tab_pad; 369 ++ind_len; 370 if (p != NULL) 371 *p++ = TAB; 372 } 373 374 /* Add tabs required for indent */ 375 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 376 { 377 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 378 ++ind_len; 379 if (p != NULL) 380 *p++ = TAB; 381 } 382 383 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */ 384 while (todo > 0) 385 { 386 --todo; 387 ++ind_len; 388 if (p != NULL) 389 *p++ = ' '; 390 } 391 392 if (p == NULL) 393 { 394 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent 395 * and the rest of the line. */ 396 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1; 397 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len); 398 if (line == NULL) 399 return FALSE; 400 p = line; 401 } 402 } 403 404 /* Append the original line */ 405 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len); 406 407 /* Replace the line */ 408 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE); 409 410 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */ 411 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len; 412 return TRUE; 413 } 414 415 /* 416 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no 417 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list. 418 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers. 419 */ 420 int 421 get_number_indent(lnum) 422 linenr_T lnum; 423 { 424 colnr_T col; 425 pos_T pos; 426 regmmatch_T regmatch; 427 428 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 429 return -1; 430 pos.lnum = 0; 431 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC); 432 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL) 433 { 434 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE; 435 regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0; 436 if (vim_regexec_multi(®match, curwin, curbuf, lnum, 437 (colnr_T)0, NULL)) 438 { 439 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum; 440 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col; 441 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 442 pos.coladd = 0; 443 #endif 444 } 445 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 446 } 447 448 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL) 449 return -1; 450 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL); 451 return (int)col; 452 } 453 454 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) 455 456 static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line)); 457 458 /* 459 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'. 460 */ 461 static int 462 cin_is_cinword(line) 463 char_u *line; 464 { 465 char_u *cinw; 466 char_u *cinw_buf; 467 int cinw_len; 468 int retval = FALSE; 469 int len; 470 471 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1; 472 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len); 473 if (cinw_buf != NULL) 474 { 475 line = skipwhite(line); 476 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; ) 477 { 478 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ","); 479 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0 480 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1]))) 481 { 482 retval = TRUE; 483 break; 484 } 485 } 486 vim_free(cinw_buf); 487 } 488 return retval; 489 } 490 #endif 491 492 /* 493 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line. 494 * 495 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the 496 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line. 497 * 498 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of 499 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a 500 * new line. 501 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor 502 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments 503 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces 504 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break 505 * 506 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure 507 */ 508 int 509 open_line(dir, flags, old_indent) 510 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */ 511 int flags; 512 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */ 513 { 514 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */ 515 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */ 516 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */ 517 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */ 518 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */ 519 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */ 520 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */ 521 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */ 522 int n; 523 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */ 524 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */ 525 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 526 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */ 527 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */ 528 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */ 529 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */ 530 #endif 531 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */ 532 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \ 533 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) 534 char_u *p; 535 #endif 536 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */ 537 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) 538 pos_T *pos; 539 #endif 540 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 541 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si 542 # ifdef FEAT_CINDENT 543 && !curbuf->b_p_cin 544 # endif 545 ); 546 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */ 547 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */ 548 #endif 549 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 550 int vreplace_mode; 551 #endif 552 int did_append; /* appended a new line */ 553 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */ 554 555 /* 556 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it 557 */ 558 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline()); 559 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */ 560 return FALSE; 561 562 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 563 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 564 { 565 /* 566 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be 567 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play 568 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then 569 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the 570 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto 571 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right 572 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb. 573 */ 574 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count) 575 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1)); 576 else 577 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)""); 578 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */ 579 goto theend; 580 581 /* 582 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts 583 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the 584 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that 585 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent 586 * etc) a bit later. 587 */ 588 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */ 589 replace_push(NUL); 590 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col; 591 while (*p != NUL) 592 { 593 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 594 if (has_mbyte) 595 p += replace_push_mb(p); 596 else 597 #endif 598 replace_push(*p++); 599 } 600 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 601 } 602 #endif 603 604 if ((State & INSERT) 605 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 606 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 607 #endif 608 ) 609 { 610 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col; 611 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 612 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */ 613 { 614 p = skipwhite(p_extra); 615 first_char = *p; 616 } 617 #endif 618 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 619 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra); 620 #endif 621 saved_char = *p_extra; 622 *p_extra = NUL; 623 } 624 625 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */ 626 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 627 did_si = FALSE; 628 #endif 629 ai_col = 0; 630 631 /* 632 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on 633 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not 634 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai. 635 */ 636 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai) 637 trunc_line = TRUE; 638 639 /* 640 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what 641 * indent to use for the new line. 642 */ 643 if (curbuf->b_p_ai 644 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 645 || do_si 646 #endif 647 ) 648 { 649 /* 650 * count white space on current line 651 */ 652 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 653 if (newindent == 0) 654 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */ 655 656 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 657 /* 658 * Do smart indenting. 659 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD) 660 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{' 661 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line 662 * "if (condition) {" 663 */ 664 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL 665 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{')) 666 { 667 char_u *ptr; 668 char_u last_char; 669 670 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 671 ptr = saved_line; 672 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 673 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 674 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE); 675 else 676 lead_len = 0; 677 # endif 678 if (dir == FORWARD) 679 { 680 /* 681 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are 682 * recognised as comments. 683 */ 684 if ( 685 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 686 lead_len == 0 && 687 # endif 688 ptr[0] == '#') 689 { 690 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 691 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 692 newindent = get_indent(); 693 } 694 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 695 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 696 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE); 697 else 698 lead_len = 0; 699 if (lead_len > 0) 700 { 701 /* 702 * This case gets the following right: 703 * \* 704 * * A comment (read '\' as '/'). 705 * *\ 706 * #define IN_THE_WAY 707 * This should line up here; 708 */ 709 p = skipwhite(ptr); 710 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*') 711 p++; 712 if (p[0] == '*') 713 { 714 for (p++; *p; p++) 715 { 716 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*') 717 { 718 /* 719 * End of C comment, indent should line up 720 * with the line containing the start of 721 * the comment 722 */ 723 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr); 724 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL) 725 { 726 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 727 newindent = get_indent(); 728 } 729 } 730 } 731 } 732 } 733 else /* Not a comment line */ 734 # endif 735 { 736 /* Find last non-blank in line */ 737 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1; 738 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p)) 739 --p; 740 last_char = *p; 741 742 /* 743 * find the character just before the '{' or ';' 744 */ 745 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';') 746 { 747 if (p > ptr) 748 --p; 749 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p)) 750 --p; 751 } 752 /* 753 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple 754 * lines. eg: 755 * if (condition && 756 * condition) { 757 * Should line up here! 758 * } 759 */ 760 if (*p == ')') 761 { 762 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr); 763 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL) 764 { 765 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 766 newindent = get_indent(); 767 ptr = ml_get_curline(); 768 } 769 } 770 /* 771 * If last character is '{' do indent, without 772 * checking for "if" and the like. 773 */ 774 if (last_char == '{') 775 { 776 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */ 777 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */ 778 } 779 /* 780 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'. 781 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or 782 * '}'. 783 */ 784 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}' 785 && cin_is_cinword(ptr)) 786 did_si = TRUE; 787 } 788 } 789 else /* dir == BACKWARD */ 790 { 791 /* 792 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are 793 * recognised as comments. 794 */ 795 if ( 796 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 797 lead_len == 0 && 798 # endif 799 ptr[0] == '#') 800 { 801 int was_backslashed = FALSE; 802 803 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) && 804 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 805 { 806 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\') 807 was_backslashed = TRUE; 808 else 809 was_backslashed = FALSE; 810 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 811 } 812 if (was_backslashed) 813 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */ 814 else 815 newindent = get_indent(); 816 } 817 p = skipwhite(ptr); 818 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */ 819 did_si = TRUE; 820 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */ 821 can_si_back = TRUE; 822 } 823 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 824 } 825 if (do_si) 826 can_si = TRUE; 827 #endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */ 828 829 did_ai = TRUE; 830 } 831 832 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 833 /* 834 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader. 835 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line. 836 */ 837 end_comment_pending = NUL; 838 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 839 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD); 840 else 841 lead_len = 0; 842 if (lead_len > 0) 843 { 844 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */ 845 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */ 846 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */ 847 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */ 848 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */ 849 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */ 850 int current_flag; 851 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */ 852 char_u *p2; 853 854 /* 855 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not 856 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader. 857 */ 858 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p) 859 { 860 if (*p == COM_BLANK) 861 { 862 require_blank = TRUE; 863 continue; 864 } 865 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE) 866 { 867 current_flag = *p; 868 if (*p == COM_START) 869 { 870 /* 871 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader. 872 */ 873 if (dir == BACKWARD) 874 { 875 lead_len = 0; 876 break; 877 } 878 879 /* find start of middle part */ 880 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 881 require_blank = FALSE; 882 } 883 884 /* 885 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader. 886 */ 887 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */ 888 { 889 if (*p == COM_BLANK) 890 require_blank = TRUE; 891 ++p; 892 } 893 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 894 895 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */ 896 { 897 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */ 898 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END) 899 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */ 900 ++p; 901 } 902 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 903 904 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */ 905 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1]; 906 907 /* 908 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use 909 * the comment leader. 910 */ 911 if (dir == FORWARD) 912 { 913 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p) 914 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0) 915 { 916 comment_end = p; 917 lead_len = 0; 918 break; 919 } 920 } 921 922 /* 923 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader. 924 */ 925 if (lead_len > 0) 926 { 927 if (current_flag == COM_START) 928 { 929 lead_repl = lead_middle; 930 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle); 931 } 932 933 /* 934 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start 935 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle 936 * comment leader on the next line. 937 */ 938 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1]) 939 && ((p_extra != NULL 940 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len) 941 || (p_extra == NULL 942 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL) 943 || require_blank)) 944 extra_space = TRUE; 945 } 946 break; 947 } 948 if (*p == COM_END) 949 { 950 /* 951 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader. 952 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the 953 * start (for C-comments). 954 */ 955 if (dir == FORWARD) 956 { 957 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line); 958 lead_len = 0; 959 break; 960 } 961 962 /* 963 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader. 964 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards. 965 */ 966 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',') 967 --p; 968 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com 969 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl) 970 ; 971 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl); 972 973 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on 974 * the comment-end */ 975 extra_space = TRUE; 976 977 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */ 978 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++) 979 { 980 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END) 981 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */ 982 } 983 if (end_comment_pending == -1) 984 { 985 /* Find last character in end-comment string */ 986 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',') 987 p2++; 988 end_comment_pending = p2[-1]; 989 } 990 break; 991 } 992 if (*p == COM_FIRST) 993 { 994 /* 995 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader 996 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o". 997 */ 998 if (dir == BACKWARD) 999 lead_len = 0; 1000 else 1001 { 1002 lead_repl = (char_u *)""; 1003 lead_repl_len = 0; 1004 } 1005 break; 1006 } 1007 } 1008 if (lead_len) 1009 { 1010 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */ 1011 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space + 1012 extra_len + 1); 1013 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */ 1014 1015 if (leader == NULL) 1016 lead_len = 0; 1017 else 1018 { 1019 vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len); 1020 1021 /* 1022 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted 1023 */ 1024 if (lead_repl != NULL) 1025 { 1026 int c = 0; 1027 int off = 0; 1028 1029 for (p = lead_flags; *p != NUL && *p != ':'; ) 1030 { 1031 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT) 1032 c = *p++; 1033 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-') 1034 off = getdigits(&p); 1035 else 1036 ++p; 1037 } 1038 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */ 1039 { 1040 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */ 1041 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader 1042 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p) 1043 ; 1044 ++p; 1045 1046 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1047 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in 1048 * screen characters, not bytes. */ 1049 { 1050 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl, 1051 lead_repl_len); 1052 int old_size = 0; 1053 char_u *endp = p; 1054 int l; 1055 1056 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader) 1057 { 1058 mb_ptr_back(leader, p); 1059 old_size += ptr2cells(p); 1060 } 1061 l = lead_repl_len - (int)(endp - p); 1062 if (l != 0) 1063 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp, 1064 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp)); 1065 lead_len += l; 1066 } 1067 #else 1068 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len) 1069 p = leader; 1070 else 1071 p -= lead_repl_len; 1072 #endif 1073 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len); 1074 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len) 1075 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL; 1076 1077 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */ 1078 while (--p >= leader) 1079 { 1080 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1081 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p); 1082 1083 if (l > 1) 1084 { 1085 p -= l; 1086 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1) 1087 { 1088 p[1] = ' '; 1089 --l; 1090 } 1091 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1, 1092 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1))); 1093 lead_len -= l; 1094 *p = ' '; 1095 } 1096 else 1097 #endif 1098 if (!vim_iswhite(*p)) 1099 *p = ' '; 1100 } 1101 } 1102 else /* left adjusted leader */ 1103 { 1104 p = skipwhite(leader); 1105 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1106 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in 1107 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is 1108 * not to be overwritten. */ 1109 { 1110 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl, 1111 lead_repl_len); 1112 int i; 1113 int l; 1114 1115 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l) 1116 { 1117 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i); 1118 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size) 1119 break; 1120 } 1121 if (i != lead_repl_len) 1122 { 1123 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i, 1124 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (p - leader))); 1125 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i; 1126 } 1127 } 1128 #endif 1129 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len); 1130 1131 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old 1132 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must 1133 * remain the same. */ 1134 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p) 1135 if (!vim_iswhite(*p)) 1136 { 1137 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */ 1138 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB) 1139 { 1140 --lead_len; 1141 mch_memmove(p, p + 1, 1142 (leader + lead_len) - p); 1143 } 1144 else 1145 { 1146 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1147 int l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p); 1148 1149 if (l > 1) 1150 { 1151 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1) 1152 { 1153 /* Replace a double-wide char with 1154 * two spaces */ 1155 --l; 1156 *p++ = ' '; 1157 } 1158 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l, 1159 (leader + lead_len) - p); 1160 lead_len -= l - 1; 1161 } 1162 #endif 1163 *p = ' '; 1164 } 1165 } 1166 *p = NUL; 1167 } 1168 1169 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */ 1170 if (curbuf->b_p_ai 1171 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1172 || do_si 1173 #endif 1174 ) 1175 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 1176 1177 /* Add the indent offset */ 1178 if (newindent + off < 0) 1179 { 1180 off = -newindent; 1181 newindent = 0; 1182 } 1183 else 1184 newindent += off; 1185 1186 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that 1187 * alignment remains equal. */ 1188 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0 1189 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ') 1190 { 1191 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */ 1192 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL) 1193 break; 1194 --lead_len; 1195 --off; 1196 } 1197 1198 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an 1199 * extra space */ 1200 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1])) 1201 extra_space = FALSE; 1202 leader[lead_len] = NUL; 1203 } 1204 1205 if (extra_space) 1206 { 1207 leader[lead_len++] = ' '; 1208 leader[lead_len] = NUL; 1209 } 1210 1211 newcol = lead_len; 1212 1213 /* 1214 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that 1215 * is in the comment leader 1216 */ 1217 if (newindent 1218 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1219 || did_si 1220 #endif 1221 ) 1222 { 1223 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader)) 1224 { 1225 --lead_len; 1226 --newcol; 1227 ++leader; 1228 } 1229 } 1230 1231 } 1232 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1233 did_si = can_si = FALSE; 1234 #endif 1235 } 1236 else if (comment_end != NULL) 1237 { 1238 /* 1239 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader. 1240 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal 1241 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the 1242 * comment. 1243 */ 1244 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' && 1245 (curbuf->b_p_ai 1246 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1247 || do_si 1248 #endif 1249 )) 1250 { 1251 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 1252 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line); 1253 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL) 1254 { 1255 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 1256 newindent = get_indent(); 1257 } 1258 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 1259 } 1260 } 1261 } 1262 #endif 1263 1264 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */ 1265 if (p_extra != NULL) 1266 { 1267 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */ 1268 1269 /* 1270 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first 1271 * non-blank. 1272 * 1273 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack, 1274 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered. 1275 */ 1276 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1277 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */ 1278 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES)) 1279 { 1280 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t') 1281 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1282 && (!enc_utf8 1283 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1))) 1284 #endif 1285 ) 1286 { 1287 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1288 replace_push(*p_extra); 1289 ++p_extra; 1290 ++less_cols_off; 1291 } 1292 } 1293 if (*p_extra != NUL) 1294 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */ 1295 1296 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */ 1297 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line); 1298 } 1299 1300 if (p_extra == NULL) 1301 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */ 1302 1303 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1304 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */ 1305 if (lead_len) 1306 { 1307 STRCAT(leader, p_extra); 1308 p_extra = leader; 1309 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */ 1310 less_cols -= lead_len; 1311 } 1312 else 1313 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */ 1314 #endif 1315 1316 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 1317 if (dir == BACKWARD) 1318 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1319 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1320 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count) 1321 #endif 1322 { 1323 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE) 1324 == FAIL) 1325 goto theend; 1326 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding 1327 * with markers. */ 1328 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L); 1329 did_append = TRUE; 1330 } 1331 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1332 else 1333 { 1334 /* 1335 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line. 1336 */ 1337 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++; 1338 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed) 1339 { 1340 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL 1341 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice. 1342 */ 1343 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */ 1344 vr_lines_changed++; 1345 } 1346 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE); 1347 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0); 1348 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 1349 did_append = FALSE; 1350 } 1351 #endif 1352 1353 if (newindent 1354 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1355 || did_si 1356 #endif 1357 ) 1358 { 1359 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1360 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1361 if (did_si) 1362 { 1363 if (p_sr) 1364 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw; 1365 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw; 1366 } 1367 #endif 1368 /* Copy the indent */ 1369 if (curbuf->b_p_ci) 1370 { 1371 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line); 1372 1373 /* 1374 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing 1375 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve 1376 * it. It gets restored at the function end. 1377 */ 1378 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE; 1379 } 1380 else 1381 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT); 1382 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col; 1383 1384 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 1385 1386 /* 1387 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must 1388 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS 1389 */ 1390 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1391 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n) 1392 replace_push(NUL); 1393 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col; 1394 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1395 if (no_si) 1396 did_si = FALSE; 1397 #endif 1398 } 1399 1400 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1401 /* 1402 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be 1403 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS. 1404 */ 1405 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1406 while (lead_len-- > 0) 1407 replace_push(NUL); 1408 #endif 1409 1410 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 1411 1412 if (dir == FORWARD) 1413 { 1414 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT)) 1415 { 1416 /* truncate current line at cursor */ 1417 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 1418 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */ 1419 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL)) 1420 truncate_spaces(saved_line); 1421 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE); 1422 saved_line = NULL; 1423 if (did_append) 1424 { 1425 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col, 1426 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L); 1427 did_append = FALSE; 1428 1429 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */ 1430 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX) 1431 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1432 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off, 1433 1L, (long)-less_cols); 1434 } 1435 else 1436 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 1437 } 1438 1439 /* 1440 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may 1441 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor. 1442 */ 1443 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1; 1444 } 1445 if (did_append) 1446 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L); 1447 1448 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol; 1449 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1450 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 1451 #endif 1452 1453 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 1454 /* 1455 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop 1456 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in 1457 * normal INSERT mode. 1458 */ 1459 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1460 { 1461 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */ 1462 State = INSERT; 1463 } 1464 else 1465 vreplace_mode = 0; 1466 #endif 1467 #ifdef FEAT_LISP 1468 /* 1469 * May do lisp indenting. 1470 */ 1471 if (!p_paste 1472 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1473 && leader == NULL 1474 # endif 1475 && curbuf->b_p_lisp 1476 && curbuf->b_p_ai) 1477 { 1478 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent); 1479 p = ml_get_curline(); 1480 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p); 1481 } 1482 #endif 1483 #ifdef FEAT_CINDENT 1484 /* 1485 * May do indenting after opening a new line. 1486 */ 1487 if (!p_paste 1488 && (curbuf->b_p_cin 1489 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL 1490 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL 1491 # endif 1492 ) 1493 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD 1494 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW 1495 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))) 1496 { 1497 do_c_expr_indent(); 1498 p = ml_get_curline(); 1499 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p); 1500 } 1501 #endif 1502 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 1503 if (vreplace_mode != 0) 1504 State = vreplace_mode; 1505 #endif 1506 1507 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1508 /* 1509 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the 1510 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff 1511 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()). 1512 */ 1513 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1514 { 1515 /* Put new line in p_extra */ 1516 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline()); 1517 if (p_extra == NULL) 1518 goto theend; 1519 1520 /* Put back original line */ 1521 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE); 1522 1523 /* Insert new stuff into line again */ 1524 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 1525 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1526 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 1527 #endif 1528 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */ 1529 vim_free(p_extra); 1530 next_line = NULL; 1531 } 1532 #endif 1533 1534 retval = TRUE; /* success! */ 1535 theend: 1536 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi; 1537 vim_free(saved_line); 1538 vim_free(next_line); 1539 vim_free(allocated); 1540 return retval; 1541 } 1542 1543 #if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO) 1544 /* 1545 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string 1546 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is 1547 * returned. 1548 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized 1549 * comment leader. 1550 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command. 1551 */ 1552 int 1553 get_leader_len(line, flags, backward) 1554 char_u *line; 1555 char_u **flags; 1556 int backward; 1557 { 1558 int i, j; 1559 int got_com = FALSE; 1560 int found_one; 1561 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */ 1562 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */ 1563 char_u *list; 1564 1565 i = 0; 1566 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */ 1567 ++i; 1568 1569 /* 1570 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings. 1571 */ 1572 while (line[i]) 1573 { 1574 /* 1575 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match 1576 */ 1577 found_one = FALSE; 1578 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; ) 1579 { 1580 /* 1581 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one. 1582 * put string at start of string. 1583 */ 1584 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */ 1585 *flags = list; 1586 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 1587 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':'); 1588 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */ 1589 continue; 1590 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */ 1591 1592 /* 1593 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further 1594 * nested comments. 1595 */ 1596 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL) 1597 continue; 1598 1599 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */ 1600 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL) 1601 continue; 1602 1603 /* 1604 * Line contents and string must match. 1605 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space 1606 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of 1607 * TABs and spaces). 1608 */ 1609 if (vim_iswhite(string[0])) 1610 { 1611 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1])) 1612 continue; 1613 while (vim_iswhite(string[0])) 1614 ++string; 1615 } 1616 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j) 1617 ; 1618 if (string[j] != NUL) 1619 continue; 1620 1621 /* 1622 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an 1623 * end-of-line after the string in the line. 1624 */ 1625 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL 1626 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL) 1627 continue; 1628 1629 /* 1630 * We have found a match, stop searching. 1631 */ 1632 i += j; 1633 got_com = TRUE; 1634 found_one = TRUE; 1635 break; 1636 } 1637 1638 /* 1639 * No match found, stop scanning. 1640 */ 1641 if (!found_one) 1642 break; 1643 1644 /* 1645 * Include any trailing white space. 1646 */ 1647 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) 1648 ++i; 1649 1650 /* 1651 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here. 1652 */ 1653 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL) 1654 break; 1655 } 1656 return (got_com ? i : 0); 1657 } 1658 #endif 1659 1660 /* 1661 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum". 1662 */ 1663 int 1664 plines(lnum) 1665 linenr_T lnum; 1666 { 1667 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE); 1668 } 1669 1670 int 1671 plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight) 1672 win_T *wp; 1673 linenr_T lnum; 1674 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */ 1675 { 1676 #if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO) 1677 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result 1678 * is one line anyway. */ 1679 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum); 1680 } 1681 1682 int 1683 plines_nofill(lnum) 1684 linenr_T lnum; 1685 { 1686 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE); 1687 } 1688 1689 int 1690 plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) 1691 win_T *wp; 1692 linenr_T lnum; 1693 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */ 1694 { 1695 #endif 1696 int lines; 1697 1698 if (!wp->w_p_wrap) 1699 return 1; 1700 1701 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT 1702 if (wp->w_width == 0) 1703 return 1; 1704 #endif 1705 1706 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 1707 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */ 1708 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */ 1709 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE) 1710 return 1; 1711 #endif 1712 1713 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum); 1714 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height) 1715 return (int)wp->w_height; 1716 return lines; 1717 } 1718 1719 /* 1720 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window 1721 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'. 1722 */ 1723 int 1724 plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum) 1725 win_T *wp; 1726 linenr_T lnum; 1727 { 1728 char_u *s; 1729 long col; 1730 int width; 1731 1732 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE); 1733 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */ 1734 return 1; 1735 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL); 1736 1737 /* 1738 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one 1739 * extra column. 1740 */ 1741 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL) 1742 col += 1; 1743 1744 /* 1745 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'. 1746 */ 1747 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp); 1748 if (width <= 0) 1749 return 32000; 1750 if (col <= width) 1751 return 1; 1752 col -= width; 1753 width += win_col_off2(wp); 1754 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1; 1755 } 1756 1757 /* 1758 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines 1759 * used from the start of the line to the given column number. 1760 */ 1761 int 1762 plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column) 1763 win_T *wp; 1764 linenr_T lnum; 1765 long column; 1766 { 1767 long col; 1768 char_u *s; 1769 int lines = 0; 1770 int width; 1771 1772 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 1773 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result 1774 * is one line anyway. */ 1775 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum); 1776 #endif 1777 1778 if (!wp->w_p_wrap) 1779 return lines + 1; 1780 1781 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT 1782 if (wp->w_width == 0) 1783 return lines + 1; 1784 #endif 1785 1786 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE); 1787 1788 col = 0; 1789 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0) 1790 { 1791 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL); 1792 mb_ptr_adv(s); 1793 } 1794 1795 /* 1796 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in 1797 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last 1798 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps 1799 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of 1800 * 'ts') -- webb. 1801 */ 1802 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1)) 1803 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1; 1804 1805 /* 1806 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc. 1807 */ 1808 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp); 1809 if (width <= 0) 1810 return 9999; 1811 1812 lines += 1; 1813 if (col > width) 1814 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp)) + 1; 1815 return lines; 1816 } 1817 1818 int 1819 plines_m_win(wp, first, last) 1820 win_T *wp; 1821 linenr_T first, last; 1822 { 1823 int count = 0; 1824 1825 while (first <= last) 1826 { 1827 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 1828 int x; 1829 1830 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines 1831 * that are maybe folded. */ 1832 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL); 1833 if (x > 0) 1834 { 1835 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */ 1836 first += x; 1837 } 1838 else 1839 #endif 1840 { 1841 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 1842 if (first == wp->w_topline) 1843 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill; 1844 else 1845 #endif 1846 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE); 1847 ++first; 1848 } 1849 } 1850 return (count); 1851 } 1852 1853 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO) 1854 /* 1855 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte. 1856 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters. 1857 */ 1858 void 1859 ins_bytes(p) 1860 char_u *p; 1861 { 1862 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p)); 1863 } 1864 #endif 1865 1866 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \ 1867 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 1868 /* 1869 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position. 1870 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters. 1871 */ 1872 void 1873 ins_bytes_len(p, len) 1874 char_u *p; 1875 int len; 1876 { 1877 int i; 1878 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1879 int n; 1880 1881 if (has_mbyte) 1882 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n) 1883 { 1884 if (enc_utf8) 1885 /* avoid reading past p[len] */ 1886 n = utfc_ptr2len_len(p + i, len - i); 1887 else 1888 n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i); 1889 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n); 1890 } 1891 else 1892 # endif 1893 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) 1894 ins_char(p[i]); 1895 } 1896 #endif 1897 1898 /* 1899 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position. 1900 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character. 1901 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 1902 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must 1903 * convert bytes to a character. 1904 */ 1905 void 1906 ins_char(c) 1907 int c; 1908 { 1909 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 1910 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES]; 1911 int n; 1912 1913 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf); 1914 1915 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte. 1916 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */ 1917 if (buf[0] == 0) 1918 buf[0] = '\n'; 1919 1920 ins_char_bytes(buf, n); 1921 } 1922 1923 void 1924 ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen) 1925 char_u *buf; 1926 int charlen; 1927 { 1928 int c = buf[0]; 1929 #endif 1930 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */ 1931 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */ 1932 char_u *p; 1933 char_u *newp; 1934 char_u *oldp; 1935 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */ 1936 colnr_T col; 1937 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1938 int i; 1939 1940 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1941 /* Break tabs if needed. */ 1942 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0) 1943 coladvance_force(getviscol()); 1944 #endif 1945 1946 col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 1947 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 1948 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1; 1949 1950 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */ 1951 oldlen = 0; 1952 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1953 newlen = charlen; 1954 #else 1955 newlen = 1; 1956 #endif 1957 1958 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG) 1959 { 1960 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1961 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1962 { 1963 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */ 1964 colnr_T vcol; 1965 int old_list; 1966 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE 1967 char_u buf[2]; 1968 #endif 1969 1970 /* 1971 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag. 1972 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished, 1973 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this. 1974 */ 1975 old_list = curwin->w_p_list; 1976 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL) 1977 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE; 1978 1979 /* 1980 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more 1981 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to 1982 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen 1983 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap. 1984 */ 1985 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL); 1986 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE 1987 buf[0] = c; 1988 buf[1] = NUL; 1989 #endif 1990 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol); 1991 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol) 1992 { 1993 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol); 1994 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right 1995 * position. */ 1996 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB) 1997 break; 1998 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1999 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen); 2000 #else 2001 ++oldlen; 2002 #endif 2003 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */ 2004 if (vcol > new_vcol) 2005 newlen += vcol - new_vcol; 2006 } 2007 curwin->w_p_list = old_list; 2008 } 2009 else 2010 #endif 2011 if (oldp[col] != NUL) 2012 { 2013 /* normal replace */ 2014 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2015 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col); 2016 #else 2017 oldlen = 1; 2018 #endif 2019 } 2020 2021 2022 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be 2023 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are 2024 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off 2025 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */ 2026 replace_push(NUL); 2027 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i) 2028 { 2029 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2030 if (has_mbyte) 2031 i += replace_push_mb(oldp + col + i) - 1; 2032 else 2033 #endif 2034 replace_push(oldp[col + i]); 2035 } 2036 } 2037 2038 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen)); 2039 if (newp == NULL) 2040 return; 2041 2042 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */ 2043 if (col > 0) 2044 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2045 2046 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */ 2047 p = newp + col; 2048 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen, 2049 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen)); 2050 2051 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */ 2052 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2053 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen); 2054 i = charlen; 2055 #else 2056 *p = c; 2057 i = 1; 2058 #endif 2059 2060 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */ 2061 while (i < newlen) 2062 p[i++] = ' '; 2063 2064 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */ 2065 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2066 2067 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2068 changed_bytes(lnum, col); 2069 2070 /* 2071 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly 2072 * show the match for right parens and braces. 2073 */ 2074 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT) 2075 && msg_silent == 0 2076 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2077 && charlen == 1 2078 #endif 2079 #ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND 2080 && !ins_compl_active() 2081 #endif 2082 ) 2083 showmatch(c); 2084 2085 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT 2086 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG)) 2087 #endif 2088 { 2089 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */ 2090 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2091 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen; 2092 #else 2093 ++curwin->w_cursor.col; 2094 #endif 2095 } 2096 /* 2097 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later. 2098 */ 2099 } 2100 2101 /* 2102 * Insert a string at the cursor position. 2103 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode. 2104 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2105 */ 2106 void 2107 ins_str(s) 2108 char_u *s; 2109 { 2110 char_u *oldp, *newp; 2111 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s); 2112 int oldlen; 2113 colnr_T col; 2114 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2115 2116 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2117 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0) 2118 coladvance_force(getviscol()); 2119 #endif 2120 2121 col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2122 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 2123 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp); 2124 2125 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1)); 2126 if (newp == NULL) 2127 return; 2128 if (col > 0) 2129 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2130 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen); 2131 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1)); 2132 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2133 changed_bytes(lnum, col); 2134 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen; 2135 } 2136 2137 /* 2138 * Delete one character under the cursor. 2139 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line. 2140 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2141 * 2142 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2143 */ 2144 int 2145 del_char(fixpos) 2146 int fixpos; 2147 { 2148 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2149 if (has_mbyte) 2150 { 2151 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */ 2152 mb_adjust_cursor(); 2153 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL) 2154 return FAIL; 2155 return del_chars(1L, fixpos); 2156 } 2157 #endif 2158 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos, TRUE); 2159 } 2160 2161 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 2162 /* 2163 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes. 2164 */ 2165 int 2166 del_chars(count, fixpos) 2167 long count; 2168 int fixpos; 2169 { 2170 long bytes = 0; 2171 long i; 2172 char_u *p; 2173 int l; 2174 2175 p = ml_get_cursor(); 2176 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i) 2177 { 2178 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p); 2179 bytes += l; 2180 p += l; 2181 } 2182 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos, TRUE); 2183 } 2184 #endif 2185 2186 /* 2187 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor. 2188 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line. 2189 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2190 * 2191 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2192 */ 2193 int 2194 del_bytes(count, fixpos_arg, use_delcombine) 2195 long count; 2196 int fixpos_arg; 2197 int use_delcombine UNUSED; /* 'delcombine' option applies */ 2198 { 2199 char_u *oldp, *newp; 2200 colnr_T oldlen; 2201 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2202 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2203 int was_alloced; 2204 long movelen; 2205 int fixpos = fixpos_arg; 2206 2207 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 2208 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp); 2209 2210 /* 2211 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line. 2212 */ 2213 if (col >= oldlen) 2214 return FAIL; 2215 2216 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2217 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only 2218 * delete the last combining character. */ 2219 if (p_deco && use_delcombine && enc_utf8 2220 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count) 2221 { 2222 int cc[MAX_MCO]; 2223 int n; 2224 2225 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, cc); 2226 if (cc[0] != NUL) 2227 { 2228 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */ 2229 n = col; 2230 do 2231 { 2232 col = n; 2233 count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n); 2234 n += count; 2235 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n)); 2236 fixpos = 0; 2237 } 2238 } 2239 #endif 2240 2241 /* 2242 * When count is too big, reduce it. 2243 */ 2244 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */ 2245 if (movelen <= 1) 2246 { 2247 /* 2248 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and 2249 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL, 2250 * unless "restart_edit" is set or 'virtualedit' contains "onemore". 2251 */ 2252 if (col > 0 && fixpos && restart_edit == 0 2253 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2254 && (ve_flags & VE_ONEMORE) == 0 2255 #endif 2256 ) 2257 { 2258 --curwin->w_cursor.col; 2259 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2260 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 2261 #endif 2262 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2263 if (has_mbyte) 2264 curwin->w_cursor.col -= 2265 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col); 2266 #endif 2267 } 2268 count = oldlen - col; 2269 movelen = 1; 2270 } 2271 2272 /* 2273 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the 2274 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated 2275 * Can't do this when using Netbeans, because we would need to invoke 2276 * netbeans_removed(), which deallocates the line. Let ml_replace() take 2277 * care of notifiying Netbeans. 2278 */ 2279 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG 2280 if (usingNetbeans) 2281 was_alloced = FALSE; 2282 else 2283 #endif 2284 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */ 2285 if (was_alloced) 2286 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */ 2287 else 2288 { /* need to allocate a new line */ 2289 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count)); 2290 if (newp == NULL) 2291 return FAIL; 2292 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2293 } 2294 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen); 2295 if (!was_alloced) 2296 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2297 2298 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2299 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 2300 2301 return OK; 2302 } 2303 2304 /* 2305 * Delete from cursor to end of line. 2306 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2307 * 2308 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2309 */ 2310 int 2311 truncate_line(fixpos) 2312 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */ 2313 { 2314 char_u *newp; 2315 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2316 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2317 2318 if (col == 0) 2319 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)""); 2320 else 2321 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col); 2322 2323 if (newp == NULL) 2324 return FAIL; 2325 2326 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2327 2328 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2329 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 2330 2331 /* 2332 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL. 2333 */ 2334 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0) 2335 --curwin->w_cursor.col; 2336 2337 return OK; 2338 } 2339 2340 /* 2341 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor. 2342 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE. 2343 */ 2344 void 2345 del_lines(nlines, undo) 2346 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */ 2347 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */ 2348 { 2349 long n; 2350 linenr_T first = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2351 2352 if (nlines <= 0) 2353 return; 2354 2355 /* save the deleted lines for undo */ 2356 if (undo && u_savedel(first, nlines) == FAIL) 2357 return; 2358 2359 for (n = 0; n < nlines; ) 2360 { 2361 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */ 2362 break; 2363 2364 ml_delete(first, TRUE); 2365 ++n; 2366 2367 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */ 2368 if (first > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 2369 break; 2370 } 2371 2372 /* Correct the cursor position before calling deleted_lines_mark(), it may 2373 * trigger a callback to display the cursor. */ 2374 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 2375 check_cursor_lnum(); 2376 2377 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2378 deleted_lines_mark(first, n); 2379 } 2380 2381 int 2382 gchar_pos(pos) 2383 pos_T *pos; 2384 { 2385 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos); 2386 2387 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2388 if (has_mbyte) 2389 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr); 2390 #endif 2391 return (int)*ptr; 2392 } 2393 2394 int 2395 gchar_cursor() 2396 { 2397 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2398 if (has_mbyte) 2399 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor()); 2400 #endif 2401 return (int)*ml_get_cursor(); 2402 } 2403 2404 /* 2405 * Write a character at the current cursor position. 2406 * It is directly written into the block. 2407 */ 2408 void 2409 pchar_cursor(c) 2410 int c; 2411 { 2412 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE) 2413 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c; 2414 } 2415 2416 #if 0 /* not used */ 2417 /* 2418 * Put *pos at end of current buffer 2419 */ 2420 void 2421 goto_endofbuf(pos) 2422 pos_T *pos; 2423 { 2424 char_u *p; 2425 2426 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count; 2427 pos->col = 0; 2428 p = ml_get(pos->lnum); 2429 while (*p++) 2430 ++pos->col; 2431 } 2432 #endif 2433 2434 /* 2435 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first 2436 * non-blank in the line. 2437 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in 2438 * the line. 2439 */ 2440 int 2441 inindent(extra) 2442 int extra; 2443 { 2444 char_u *ptr; 2445 colnr_T col; 2446 2447 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col) 2448 ++ptr; 2449 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra) 2450 return TRUE; 2451 else 2452 return FALSE; 2453 } 2454 2455 /* 2456 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma. 2457 */ 2458 char_u * 2459 skip_to_option_part(p) 2460 char_u *p; 2461 { 2462 if (*p == ',') 2463 ++p; 2464 while (*p == ' ') 2465 ++p; 2466 return p; 2467 } 2468 2469 /* 2470 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed. 2471 * 2472 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also 2473 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn. 2474 */ 2475 void 2476 changed() 2477 { 2478 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) 2479 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't 2480 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the 2481 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */ 2482 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting) 2483 return; 2484 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE; 2485 #endif 2486 2487 if (!curbuf->b_changed) 2488 { 2489 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll; 2490 2491 /* Give a warning about changing a read-only file. This may also 2492 * check-out the file, thus change "curbuf"! */ 2493 change_warning(0); 2494 2495 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted. 2496 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */ 2497 if (curbuf->b_may_swap 2498 #ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX 2499 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf) 2500 #endif 2501 ) 2502 { 2503 ml_open_file(curbuf); 2504 2505 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message. 2506 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected 2507 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now, 2508 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */ 2509 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0) 2510 { 2511 out_flush(); 2512 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE); 2513 wait_return(TRUE); 2514 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll; 2515 } 2516 } 2517 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE; 2518 ml_setflags(curbuf); 2519 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS 2520 check_status(curbuf); 2521 redraw_tabline = TRUE; 2522 #endif 2523 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE 2524 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */ 2525 #endif 2526 } 2527 ++curbuf->b_changedtick; 2528 } 2529 2530 static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum)); 2531 static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra)); 2532 static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra)); 2533 2534 /* 2535 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer. 2536 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed 2537 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed() 2538 * - invalidates cached values 2539 */ 2540 void 2541 changed_bytes(lnum, col) 2542 linenr_T lnum; 2543 colnr_T col; 2544 { 2545 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum); 2546 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L); 2547 2548 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 2549 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */ 2550 if (curwin->w_p_diff) 2551 { 2552 win_T *wp; 2553 linenr_T wlnum; 2554 2555 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2556 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin) 2557 { 2558 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID); 2559 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp); 2560 if (wlnum > 0) 2561 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum); 2562 } 2563 } 2564 #endif 2565 } 2566 2567 static void 2568 changedOneline(buf, lnum) 2569 buf_T *buf; 2570 linenr_T lnum; 2571 { 2572 if (buf->b_mod_set) 2573 { 2574 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */ 2575 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top) 2576 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2577 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot) 2578 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1; 2579 } 2580 else 2581 { 2582 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */ 2583 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE; 2584 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2585 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1; 2586 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0; 2587 } 2588 } 2589 2590 /* 2591 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer. 2592 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2593 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag. 2594 */ 2595 void 2596 appended_lines(lnum, count) 2597 linenr_T lnum; 2598 long count; 2599 { 2600 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count); 2601 } 2602 2603 /* 2604 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first. 2605 */ 2606 void 2607 appended_lines_mark(lnum, count) 2608 linenr_T lnum; 2609 long count; 2610 { 2611 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L); 2612 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count); 2613 } 2614 2615 /* 2616 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer. 2617 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2618 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag. 2619 */ 2620 void 2621 deleted_lines(lnum, count) 2622 linenr_T lnum; 2623 long count; 2624 { 2625 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count); 2626 } 2627 2628 /* 2629 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first. 2630 * Make sure the cursor is on a valid line before calling, a GUI callback may 2631 * be triggered to display the cursor. 2632 */ 2633 void 2634 deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count) 2635 linenr_T lnum; 2636 long count; 2637 { 2638 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count); 2639 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count); 2640 } 2641 2642 /* 2643 * Changed lines for the current buffer. 2644 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2645 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed() 2646 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed 2647 * - invalidate cached values 2648 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line 2649 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change). 2650 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal. 2651 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*. 2652 */ 2653 void 2654 changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra) 2655 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */ 2656 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */ 2657 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */ 2658 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */ 2659 { 2660 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra); 2661 2662 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 2663 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff) 2664 { 2665 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't 2666 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for 2667 * displaying. */ 2668 win_T *wp; 2669 linenr_T wlnum; 2670 2671 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2672 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin) 2673 { 2674 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID); 2675 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp); 2676 if (wlnum > 0) 2677 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum, 2678 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L); 2679 } 2680 } 2681 #endif 2682 2683 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra); 2684 } 2685 2686 static void 2687 changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra) 2688 buf_T *buf; 2689 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */ 2690 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */ 2691 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */ 2692 { 2693 if (buf->b_mod_set) 2694 { 2695 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */ 2696 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top) 2697 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2698 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot) 2699 { 2700 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */ 2701 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra; 2702 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum) 2703 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum; 2704 } 2705 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot) 2706 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra; 2707 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra; 2708 } 2709 else 2710 { 2711 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */ 2712 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE; 2713 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2714 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra; 2715 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra; 2716 } 2717 } 2718 2719 static void 2720 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra) 2721 linenr_T lnum; 2722 colnr_T col; 2723 linenr_T lnume; 2724 long xtra; 2725 { 2726 win_T *wp; 2727 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS 2728 tabpage_T *tp; 2729 #endif 2730 int i; 2731 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST 2732 int cols; 2733 pos_T *p; 2734 int add; 2735 #endif 2736 2737 /* mark the buffer as modified */ 2738 changed(); 2739 2740 /* set the '. mark */ 2741 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps) 2742 { 2743 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum; 2744 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col; 2745 2746 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST 2747 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we 2748 * don't have an entry yet. */ 2749 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0) 2750 { 2751 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0) 2752 add = TRUE; 2753 else 2754 { 2755 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same 2756 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids 2757 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */ 2758 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1]; 2759 if (p->lnum != lnum) 2760 add = TRUE; 2761 else 2762 { 2763 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE); 2764 if (cols == 0) 2765 cols = 79; 2766 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col); 2767 } 2768 } 2769 if (add) 2770 { 2771 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes 2772 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new 2773 * position in the changelist. */ 2774 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE; 2775 2776 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE) 2777 { 2778 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */ 2779 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1; 2780 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1, 2781 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1)); 2782 FOR_ALL_TAB_WINDOWS(tp, wp) 2783 { 2784 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on 2785 * this buffer. */ 2786 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0) 2787 --wp->w_changelistidx; 2788 } 2789 } 2790 FOR_ALL_TAB_WINDOWS(tp, wp) 2791 { 2792 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is 2793 * at the end it stays at the end. */ 2794 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf 2795 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen) 2796 ++wp->w_changelistidx; 2797 } 2798 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen; 2799 } 2800 } 2801 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] = 2802 curbuf->b_last_change; 2803 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g," 2804 * takes you back to it. */ 2805 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen; 2806 #endif 2807 } 2808 2809 FOR_ALL_TAB_WINDOWS(tp, wp) 2810 { 2811 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf) 2812 { 2813 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */ 2814 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID) 2815 wp->w_redr_type = VALID; 2816 2817 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached 2818 * values for the cursor. */ 2819 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2820 /* 2821 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because 2822 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd". 2823 */ 2824 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1); 2825 2826 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become 2827 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that 2828 * might be displayed differently. 2829 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when 2830 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */ 2831 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL); 2832 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum) 2833 wp->w_cline_folded = i; 2834 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL); 2835 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume) 2836 wp->w_cline_folded = i; 2837 2838 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines, 2839 * compare with the first line in that range. */ 2840 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum) 2841 { 2842 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum); 2843 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum) 2844 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp); 2845 } 2846 #endif 2847 2848 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum) 2849 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp); 2850 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col) 2851 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp); 2852 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum) 2853 { 2854 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make 2855 * other lines scroll down below botline). */ 2856 approximate_botline_win(wp); 2857 } 2858 2859 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid. 2860 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for 2861 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying 2862 * after the change. */ 2863 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i) 2864 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid) 2865 { 2866 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum) 2867 { 2868 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume) 2869 { 2870 /* line included in change */ 2871 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE; 2872 } 2873 else if (xtra != 0) 2874 { 2875 /* line below change */ 2876 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra; 2877 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2878 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra; 2879 #endif 2880 } 2881 } 2882 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2883 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum) 2884 { 2885 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines, 2886 * may need to be redrawn */ 2887 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE; 2888 } 2889 #endif 2890 } 2891 2892 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2893 /* Take care of side effects for setting w_topline when folds have 2894 * changed. Esp. when the buffer was changed in another window. */ 2895 if (hasAnyFolding(wp)) 2896 set_topline(wp, wp->w_topline); 2897 #endif 2898 } 2899 } 2900 2901 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn, 2902 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */ 2903 if (must_redraw < VALID) 2904 must_redraw = VALID; 2905 2906 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2907 /* when the cursor line is changed always trigger CursorMoved */ 2908 if (lnum <= curwin->w_cursor.lnum 2909 && lnume + (xtra < 0 ? -xtra : xtra) > curwin->w_cursor.lnum) 2910 last_cursormoved.lnum = 0; 2911 #endif 2912 } 2913 2914 /* 2915 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf' 2916 */ 2917 void 2918 unchanged(buf, ff) 2919 buf_T *buf; 2920 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */ 2921 { 2922 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf))) 2923 { 2924 buf->b_changed = 0; 2925 ml_setflags(buf); 2926 if (ff) 2927 save_file_ff(buf); 2928 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS 2929 check_status(buf); 2930 redraw_tabline = TRUE; 2931 #endif 2932 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE 2933 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */ 2934 #endif 2935 } 2936 ++buf->b_changedtick; 2937 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG 2938 netbeans_unmodified(buf); 2939 #endif 2940 } 2941 2942 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO) 2943 /* 2944 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf' 2945 * need to be updated 2946 */ 2947 void 2948 check_status(buf) 2949 buf_T *buf; 2950 { 2951 win_T *wp; 2952 2953 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2954 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height) 2955 { 2956 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE; 2957 if (must_redraw < VALID) 2958 must_redraw = VALID; 2959 } 2960 } 2961 #endif 2962 2963 /* 2964 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change. 2965 * Don't do this for autocommands. 2966 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer. 2967 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn" 2968 * will be TRUE. 2969 */ 2970 void 2971 change_warning(col) 2972 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert 2973 mode and 'showmode' is on */ 2974 { 2975 static char *w_readonly = N_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"); 2976 2977 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE 2978 && curbufIsChanged() == 0 2979 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2980 && !autocmd_busy 2981 #endif 2982 && curbuf->b_p_ro) 2983 { 2984 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2985 ++curbuf_lock; 2986 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf); 2987 --curbuf_lock; 2988 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro) 2989 return; 2990 #endif 2991 /* 2992 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should 2993 * be after the mode message. 2994 */ 2995 msg_start(); 2996 if (msg_row == Rows - 1) 2997 msg_col = col; 2998 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W)); 2999 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_(w_readonly), hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST); 3000 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL 3001 set_vim_var_string(VV_WARNINGMSG, (char_u *)_(w_readonly), -1); 3002 #endif 3003 msg_clr_eos(); 3004 (void)msg_end(); 3005 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode) 3006 { 3007 out_flush(); 3008 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */ 3009 } 3010 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE; 3011 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */ 3012 if (msg_row < Rows - 1) 3013 showmode(); 3014 } 3015 } 3016 3017 /* 3018 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'. 3019 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid 3020 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit. 3021 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters 3022 * from any buffers but directly from the user. 3023 * 3024 * return the 'y' or 'n' 3025 */ 3026 int 3027 ask_yesno(str, direct) 3028 char_u *str; 3029 int direct; 3030 { 3031 int r = ' '; 3032 int save_State = State; 3033 3034 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */ 3035 settmode(TMODE_RAW); 3036 ++no_wait_return; 3037 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL 3038 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */ 3039 #endif 3040 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */ 3041 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 3042 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */ 3043 #endif 3044 ++no_mapping; 3045 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */ 3046 3047 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n') 3048 { 3049 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */ 3050 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str); 3051 if (direct) 3052 r = get_keystroke(); 3053 else 3054 r = plain_vgetc(); 3055 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC) 3056 r = 'n'; 3057 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */ 3058 out_flush(); 3059 } 3060 --no_wait_return; 3061 State = save_State; 3062 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 3063 setmouse(); 3064 #endif 3065 --no_mapping; 3066 --allow_keys; 3067 3068 return r; 3069 } 3070 3071 /* 3072 * Get a key stroke directly from the user. 3073 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left 3074 * button (used at the more prompt). 3075 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters. 3076 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored. 3077 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC. 3078 */ 3079 int 3080 get_keystroke() 3081 { 3082 #define CBUFLEN 151 3083 char_u buf[CBUFLEN]; 3084 int len = 0; 3085 int n; 3086 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c; 3087 int waited = 0; 3088 3089 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */ 3090 for (;;) 3091 { 3092 cursor_on(); 3093 out_flush(); 3094 3095 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a 3096 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to 3097 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And 3098 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */ 3099 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3, 3100 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0); 3101 if (n > 0) 3102 { 3103 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */ 3104 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE); 3105 len += n; 3106 waited = 0; 3107 } 3108 else if (len > 0) 3109 ++waited; /* keep track of the waiting time */ 3110 3111 /* Incomplete termcode and not timed out yet: get more characters */ 3112 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0 3113 && (!p_ttimeout || waited * 100L < (p_ttm < 0 ? p_tm : p_ttm))) 3114 continue; 3115 3116 /* found a termcode: adjust length */ 3117 if (n > 0) 3118 len = n; 3119 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */ 3120 continue; 3121 3122 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */ 3123 n = buf[0]; 3124 if (n == K_SPECIAL) 3125 { 3126 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]); 3127 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER 3128 || n == K_IGNORE 3129 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 3130 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM 3131 || n == K_LEFTDRAG 3132 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE 3133 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM 3134 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE 3135 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG 3136 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE 3137 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE 3138 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG 3139 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE 3140 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN 3141 || n == K_MOUSEUP 3142 || n == K_X1MOUSE 3143 || n == K_X1DRAG 3144 || n == K_X1RELEASE 3145 || n == K_X2MOUSE 3146 || n == K_X2DRAG 3147 || n == K_X2RELEASE 3148 # ifdef FEAT_GUI 3149 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR 3150 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR 3151 # endif 3152 #endif 3153 ) 3154 { 3155 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER) 3156 mod_mask = buf[2]; 3157 len -= 3; 3158 if (len > 0) 3159 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len); 3160 continue; 3161 } 3162 break; 3163 } 3164 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 3165 if (has_mbyte) 3166 { 3167 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len) 3168 continue; /* more bytes to get */ 3169 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL; 3170 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf); 3171 } 3172 #endif 3173 #ifdef UNIX 3174 if (n == intr_char) 3175 n = ESC; 3176 #endif 3177 break; 3178 } 3179 3180 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c; 3181 return n; 3182 } 3183 3184 /* 3185 * Get a number from the user. 3186 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse. 3187 */ 3188 int 3189 get_number(colon, mouse_used) 3190 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */ 3191 int *mouse_used; 3192 { 3193 int n = 0; 3194 int c; 3195 int typed = 0; 3196 3197 if (mouse_used != NULL) 3198 *mouse_used = FALSE; 3199 3200 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a 3201 * zero (as if CR was hit). */ 3202 if (msg_silent != 0) 3203 return 0; 3204 3205 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL 3206 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */ 3207 #endif 3208 ++no_mapping; 3209 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */ 3210 for (;;) 3211 { 3212 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col); 3213 c = safe_vgetc(); 3214 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c)) 3215 { 3216 n = n * 10 + c - '0'; 3217 msg_putchar(c); 3218 ++typed; 3219 } 3220 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H) 3221 { 3222 if (typed > 0) 3223 { 3224 MSG_PUTS("\b \b"); 3225 --typed; 3226 } 3227 n /= 10; 3228 } 3229 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 3230 else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE) 3231 { 3232 *mouse_used = TRUE; 3233 n = mouse_row + 1; 3234 break; 3235 } 3236 #endif 3237 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon) 3238 { 3239 stuffcharReadbuff(':'); 3240 if (!exmode_active) 3241 cmdline_row = msg_row; 3242 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */ 3243 do_redraw = FALSE; 3244 break; 3245 } 3246 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC) 3247 break; 3248 } 3249 --no_mapping; 3250 --allow_keys; 3251 return n; 3252 } 3253 3254 /* 3255 * Ask the user to enter a number. 3256 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return 3257 * the line number. 3258 */ 3259 int 3260 prompt_for_number(mouse_used) 3261 int *mouse_used; 3262 { 3263 int i; 3264 int save_cmdline_row; 3265 int save_State; 3266 3267 /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */ 3268 if (mouse_used != NULL) 3269 MSG_PUTS(_("Type number and <Enter> or click with mouse (empty cancels): ")); 3270 else 3271 MSG_PUTS(_("Type number and <Enter> (empty cancels): ")); 3272 3273 /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted and we still 3274 * get mouse events. */ 3275 save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row; 3276 cmdline_row = 0; 3277 save_State = State; 3278 State = CMDLINE; 3279 3280 i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used); 3281 if (KeyTyped) 3282 { 3283 /* don't call wait_return() now */ 3284 /* msg_putchar('\n'); */ 3285 cmdline_row = msg_row - 1; 3286 need_wait_return = FALSE; 3287 msg_didany = FALSE; 3288 msg_didout = FALSE; 3289 } 3290 else 3291 cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row; 3292 State = save_State; 3293 3294 return i; 3295 } 3296 3297 void 3298 msgmore(n) 3299 long n; 3300 { 3301 long pn; 3302 3303 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */ 3304 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */ 3305 return; 3306 3307 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite 3308 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and 3309 * then "put" reports the last action. */ 3310 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more) 3311 return; 3312 3313 if (n > 0) 3314 pn = n; 3315 else 3316 pn = -n; 3317 3318 if (pn > p_report) 3319 { 3320 if (pn == 1) 3321 { 3322 if (n > 0) 3323 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line")); 3324 else 3325 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less")); 3326 } 3327 else 3328 { 3329 if (n > 0) 3330 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn); 3331 else 3332 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn); 3333 } 3334 if (got_int) 3335 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)")); 3336 if (msg(msg_buf)) 3337 { 3338 set_keep_msg(msg_buf, 0); 3339 keep_msg_more = TRUE; 3340 } 3341 } 3342 } 3343 3344 /* 3345 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error 3346 */ 3347 void 3348 beep_flush() 3349 { 3350 if (emsg_silent == 0) 3351 { 3352 flush_buffers(FALSE); 3353 vim_beep(); 3354 } 3355 } 3356 3357 /* 3358 * give a warning for an error 3359 */ 3360 void 3361 vim_beep() 3362 { 3363 if (emsg_silent == 0) 3364 { 3365 if (p_vb 3366 #ifdef FEAT_GUI 3367 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI 3368 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */ 3369 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting) 3370 #endif 3371 ) 3372 { 3373 out_str(T_VB); 3374 } 3375 else 3376 { 3377 #ifdef MSDOS 3378 /* 3379 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait 3380 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems 3381 * where the beeps don't overlap. 3382 */ 3383 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10) 3384 { 3385 out_char(BELL); 3386 beep_count = 1; 3387 } 3388 else 3389 ++beep_count; 3390 #else 3391 out_char(BELL); 3392 #endif 3393 } 3394 3395 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a 3396 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */ 3397 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL) 3398 { 3399 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W)); 3400 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W)); 3401 } 3402 } 3403 } 3404 3405 /* 3406 * To get the "real" home directory: 3407 * - get value of $HOME 3408 * For Unix: 3409 * - go to that directory 3410 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory. 3411 * This also works with mounts and links. 3412 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive. 3413 */ 3414 static char_u *homedir = NULL; 3415 3416 void 3417 init_homedir() 3418 { 3419 char_u *var; 3420 3421 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */ 3422 vim_free(homedir); 3423 homedir = NULL; 3424 3425 #ifdef VMS 3426 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN"); 3427 #else 3428 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME"); 3429 #endif 3430 3431 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */ 3432 var = NULL; 3433 3434 #ifdef WIN3264 3435 /* 3436 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another 3437 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set 3438 * when $HOME is being set. 3439 */ 3440 if (var != NULL && *var == '%') 3441 { 3442 char_u *p; 3443 char_u *exp; 3444 3445 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%'); 3446 if (p != NULL) 3447 { 3448 vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1)); 3449 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff); 3450 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL 3451 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL) 3452 { 3453 vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1); 3454 var = NameBuff; 3455 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */ 3456 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff); 3457 } 3458 } 3459 } 3460 3461 /* 3462 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has 3463 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT 3464 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for 3465 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these. 3466 */ 3467 if (var == NULL) 3468 { 3469 char_u *homedrive, *homepath; 3470 3471 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE"); 3472 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH"); 3473 if (homepath == NULL || *homepath == NUL) 3474 homepath = "\\"; 3475 if (homedrive != NULL 3476 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL) 3477 { 3478 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath); 3479 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL) 3480 { 3481 var = NameBuff; 3482 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */ 3483 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff); 3484 } 3485 } 3486 } 3487 3488 # if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) 3489 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL) 3490 { 3491 int len; 3492 char_u *pp; 3493 3494 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are 3495 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */ 3496 acp_to_enc(var, (int)STRLEN(var), &pp, &len); 3497 if (pp != NULL) 3498 { 3499 homedir = pp; 3500 return; 3501 } 3502 } 3503 # endif 3504 #endif 3505 3506 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) 3507 /* 3508 * Default home dir is C:/ 3509 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation. 3510 */ 3511 if (var == NULL) 3512 var = "C:/"; 3513 #endif 3514 if (var != NULL) 3515 { 3516 #ifdef UNIX 3517 /* 3518 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves 3519 * links. Don't do it when we can't return. 3520 */ 3521 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK 3522 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0) 3523 { 3524 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK) 3525 var = IObuff; 3526 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0) 3527 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir)); 3528 } 3529 #endif 3530 homedir = vim_strsave(var); 3531 } 3532 } 3533 3534 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO) 3535 void 3536 free_homedir() 3537 { 3538 vim_free(homedir); 3539 } 3540 #endif 3541 3542 /* 3543 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string. 3544 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed 3545 * again soon. 3546 */ 3547 char_u * 3548 expand_env_save(src) 3549 char_u *src; 3550 { 3551 return expand_env_save_opt(src, FALSE); 3552 } 3553 3554 /* 3555 * Idem, but when "one" is TRUE handle the string as one file name, only 3556 * expand "~" at the start. 3557 */ 3558 char_u * 3559 expand_env_save_opt(src, one) 3560 char_u *src; 3561 int one; 3562 { 3563 char_u *p; 3564 3565 p = alloc(MAXPATHL); 3566 if (p != NULL) 3567 expand_env_esc(src, p, MAXPATHL, FALSE, one, NULL); 3568 return p; 3569 } 3570 3571 /* 3572 * Expand environment variable with path name. 3573 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded. 3574 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$" (not for Win32 though). 3575 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src. 3576 */ 3577 void 3578 expand_env(src, dst, dstlen) 3579 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */ 3580 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 3581 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 3582 { 3583 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, FALSE, NULL); 3584 } 3585 3586 void 3587 expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, one, startstr) 3588 char_u *srcp; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */ 3589 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 3590 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 3591 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */ 3592 int one; /* "srcp" is one file name */ 3593 char_u *startstr; /* start again after this (can be NULL) */ 3594 { 3595 char_u *src; 3596 char_u *tail; 3597 int c; 3598 char_u *var; 3599 int copy_char; 3600 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */ 3601 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */ 3602 int startstr_len = 0; 3603 3604 if (startstr != NULL) 3605 startstr_len = (int)STRLEN(startstr); 3606 3607 src = skipwhite(srcp); 3608 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */ 3609 while (*src && dstlen > 0) 3610 { 3611 copy_char = TRUE; 3612 if ((*src == '$' 3613 #ifdef VMS 3614 && at_start 3615 #endif 3616 ) 3617 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 3618 || *src == '%' 3619 #endif 3620 || (*src == '~' && at_start)) 3621 { 3622 mustfree = FALSE; 3623 3624 /* 3625 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may 3626 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended. 3627 */ 3628 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */ 3629 { 3630 tail = src + 1; 3631 var = dst; 3632 c = dstlen - 1; 3633 3634 #ifdef UNIX 3635 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */ 3636 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{')) 3637 { 3638 tail++; /* ignore '{' */ 3639 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}') 3640 *var++ = *tail++; 3641 } 3642 else 3643 #endif 3644 { 3645 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail)) 3646 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 3647 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%') 3648 #endif 3649 )) 3650 { 3651 #ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */ 3652 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail); 3653 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */ 3654 #else 3655 *var++ = *tail++; 3656 #endif 3657 } 3658 } 3659 3660 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX) 3661 # ifdef UNIX 3662 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}') 3663 # else 3664 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%') 3665 # endif 3666 var = NULL; 3667 else 3668 { 3669 # ifdef UNIX 3670 if (src[1] == '{') 3671 # else 3672 if (*src == '%') 3673 #endif 3674 ++tail; 3675 #endif 3676 *var = NUL; 3677 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree); 3678 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX) 3679 } 3680 #endif 3681 } 3682 /* home directory */ 3683 else if ( src[1] == NUL 3684 || vim_ispathsep(src[1]) 3685 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL) 3686 { 3687 var = homedir; 3688 tail = src + 1; 3689 } 3690 else /* user directory */ 3691 { 3692 #if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME)) 3693 /* 3694 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it. 3695 */ 3696 tail = src; 3697 var = dst; 3698 c = dstlen - 1; 3699 while ( c-- > 0 3700 && *tail 3701 && vim_isfilec(*tail) 3702 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail)) 3703 *var++ = *tail++; 3704 *var = NUL; 3705 # ifdef UNIX 3706 /* 3707 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it. 3708 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to 3709 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell 3710 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh). 3711 */ 3712 # if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H) 3713 { 3714 struct passwd *pw; 3715 3716 /* Note: memory allocated by getpwnam() is never freed. 3717 * Calling endpwent() apparently doesn't help. */ 3718 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1); 3719 if (pw != NULL) 3720 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir; 3721 else 3722 var = NULL; 3723 } 3724 if (var == NULL) 3725 # endif 3726 { 3727 expand_T xpc; 3728 3729 ExpandInit(&xpc); 3730 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES; 3731 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL, 3732 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE); 3733 mustfree = TRUE; 3734 } 3735 3736 # else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */ 3737 /* 3738 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of 3739 * directories to search for the user account in. 3740 */ 3741 { 3742 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL]; 3743 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr; 3744 struct stat st; 3745 3746 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME); 3747 next_path = paths; 3748 while (*next_path) 3749 { 3750 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ','; 3751 next_path++); 3752 if (*next_path) 3753 *next_path++ = NUL; 3754 STRCPY(test, path); 3755 STRCAT(test, "/"); 3756 STRCAT(test, dst + 1); 3757 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0) 3758 { 3759 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1); 3760 STRCPY(var, test); 3761 mustfree = TRUE; 3762 break; 3763 } 3764 } 3765 } 3766 # endif /* UNIX */ 3767 #else 3768 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */ 3769 var = NULL; 3770 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */ 3771 #endif /* UNIX || VMS */ 3772 } 3773 3774 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 3775 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes. 3776 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */ 3777 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL) 3778 { 3779 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var); 3780 3781 if (p != NULL) 3782 { 3783 if (mustfree) 3784 vim_free(var); 3785 var = p; 3786 mustfree = TRUE; 3787 forward_slash(var); 3788 } 3789 } 3790 #endif 3791 3792 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash. 3793 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */ 3794 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL) 3795 { 3796 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t"); 3797 3798 if (p != NULL) 3799 { 3800 if (mustfree) 3801 vim_free(var); 3802 var = p; 3803 mustfree = TRUE; 3804 } 3805 } 3806 3807 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL 3808 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen)) 3809 { 3810 STRCPY(dst, var); 3811 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var); 3812 c = (int)STRLEN(var); 3813 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts 3814 * with it, skip a character */ 3815 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c) 3816 #if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA) 3817 && dst[-1] != ':' 3818 #endif 3819 && vim_ispathsep(*tail)) 3820 ++tail; 3821 dst += c; 3822 src = tail; 3823 copy_char = FALSE; 3824 } 3825 if (mustfree) 3826 vim_free(var); 3827 } 3828 3829 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */ 3830 { 3831 /* 3832 * Recognize the start of a new name, for '~'. 3833 * Don't do this when "one" is TRUE, to avoid expanding "~" in 3834 * ":edit foo ~ foo". 3835 */ 3836 at_start = FALSE; 3837 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL) 3838 { 3839 *dst++ = *src++; 3840 --dstlen; 3841 } 3842 else if ((src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',') && !one) 3843 at_start = TRUE; 3844 *dst++ = *src++; 3845 --dstlen; 3846 3847 if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp 3848 && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0) 3849 at_start = TRUE; 3850 } 3851 } 3852 *dst = NUL; 3853 } 3854 3855 /* 3856 * Vim's version of getenv(). 3857 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME. 3858 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32. 3859 */ 3860 char_u * 3861 vim_getenv(name, mustfree) 3862 char_u *name; 3863 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */ 3864 { 3865 char_u *p; 3866 char_u *pend; 3867 int vimruntime; 3868 3869 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) 3870 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */ 3871 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0) 3872 return homedir; 3873 #endif 3874 3875 p = mch_getenv(name); 3876 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */ 3877 p = NULL; 3878 3879 if (p != NULL) 3880 { 3881 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264) 3882 if (enc_utf8) 3883 { 3884 int len; 3885 char_u *pp; 3886 3887 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are 3888 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */ 3889 acp_to_enc(p, (int)STRLEN(p), &pp, &len); 3890 if (pp != NULL) 3891 { 3892 p = pp; 3893 *mustfree = TRUE; 3894 } 3895 } 3896 #endif 3897 return p; 3898 } 3899 3900 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0); 3901 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0) 3902 return NULL; 3903 3904 /* 3905 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM. 3906 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty. 3907 */ 3908 if (vimruntime 3909 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF 3910 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL 3911 #endif 3912 ) 3913 { 3914 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM"); 3915 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */ 3916 p = NULL; 3917 if (p != NULL) 3918 { 3919 p = vim_version_dir(p); 3920 if (p != NULL) 3921 *mustfree = TRUE; 3922 else 3923 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM"); 3924 3925 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264) 3926 if (enc_utf8) 3927 { 3928 int len; 3929 char_u *pp; 3930 3931 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions 3932 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII 3933 * characters. */ 3934 acp_to_enc(p, (int)STRLEN(p), &pp, &len); 3935 if (pp != NULL) 3936 { 3937 if (mustfree) 3938 vim_free(p); 3939 p = pp; 3940 *mustfree = TRUE; 3941 } 3942 } 3943 #endif 3944 } 3945 } 3946 3947 /* 3948 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using: 3949 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$') 3950 * - the executable name from argv[0] 3951 */ 3952 if (p == NULL) 3953 { 3954 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL) 3955 p = p_hf; 3956 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3957 /* 3958 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0]. 3959 */ 3960 else 3961 p = exe_name; 3962 #endif 3963 if (p != NULL) 3964 { 3965 /* remove the file name */ 3966 pend = gettail(p); 3967 3968 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */ 3969 if (p == p_hf) 3970 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc"); 3971 3972 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3973 # ifdef MACOS_X 3974 /* remove "MacOS" from exe_name and add "Resources/vim" */ 3975 if (p == exe_name) 3976 { 3977 char_u *pend1; 3978 char_u *pnew; 3979 3980 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"MacOS"); 3981 if (pend1 != pend) 3982 { 3983 pnew = alloc((unsigned)(pend1 - p) + 15); 3984 if (pnew != NULL) 3985 { 3986 STRNCPY(pnew, p, (pend1 - p)); 3987 STRCPY(pnew + (pend1 - p), "Resources/vim"); 3988 p = pnew; 3989 pend = p + STRLEN(p); 3990 } 3991 } 3992 } 3993 # endif 3994 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */ 3995 if (p == exe_name) 3996 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src"); 3997 #endif 3998 3999 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */ 4000 if (!vimruntime) 4001 { 4002 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME); 4003 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT); 4004 } 4005 4006 /* remove trailing path separator */ 4007 #ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC 4008 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */ 4009 /* to avoid confusion between absolute and relative path */ 4010 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend)) 4011 --pend; 4012 #endif 4013 4014 #ifdef MACOS_X 4015 if (p == exe_name || p == p_hf) 4016 #endif 4017 /* check that the result is a directory name */ 4018 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p)); 4019 4020 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p)) 4021 { 4022 vim_free(p); 4023 p = NULL; 4024 } 4025 else 4026 { 4027 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 4028 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */ 4029 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL) 4030 { 4031 vim_free(p); 4032 p = pend; 4033 } 4034 #endif 4035 *mustfree = TRUE; 4036 } 4037 } 4038 } 4039 4040 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF 4041 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and 4042 * default_vimruntime_dir */ 4043 if (p == NULL) 4044 { 4045 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */ 4046 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL) 4047 { 4048 p = default_vimruntime_dir; 4049 *mustfree = FALSE; 4050 } 4051 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL) 4052 { 4053 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL) 4054 *mustfree = TRUE; 4055 else 4056 { 4057 p = default_vim_dir; 4058 *mustfree = FALSE; 4059 } 4060 } 4061 } 4062 #endif 4063 4064 /* 4065 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast 4066 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl). 4067 */ 4068 if (p != NULL) 4069 { 4070 if (vimruntime) 4071 { 4072 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p); 4073 didset_vimruntime = TRUE; 4074 #ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT 4075 { 4076 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang"); 4077 4078 if (buf != NULL) 4079 { 4080 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf); 4081 vim_free(buf); 4082 } 4083 } 4084 #endif 4085 } 4086 else 4087 { 4088 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p); 4089 didset_vim = TRUE; 4090 } 4091 } 4092 return p; 4093 } 4094 4095 /* 4096 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists. 4097 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise. 4098 */ 4099 static char_u * 4100 vim_version_dir(vimdir) 4101 char_u *vimdir; 4102 { 4103 char_u *p; 4104 4105 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL) 4106 return NULL; 4107 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE); 4108 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p)) 4109 return p; 4110 vim_free(p); 4111 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE); 4112 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p)) 4113 return p; 4114 vim_free(p); 4115 return NULL; 4116 } 4117 4118 /* 4119 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus 4120 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend". 4121 */ 4122 static char_u * 4123 remove_tail(p, pend, name) 4124 char_u *p; 4125 char_u *pend; 4126 char_u *name; 4127 { 4128 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1; 4129 char_u *newend = pend - len; 4130 4131 if (newend >= p 4132 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0 4133 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))) 4134 return newend; 4135 return pend; 4136 } 4137 4138 /* 4139 * Our portable version of setenv. 4140 */ 4141 void 4142 vim_setenv(name, val) 4143 char_u *name; 4144 char_u *val; 4145 { 4146 #ifdef HAVE_SETENV 4147 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1); 4148 #else 4149 char_u *envbuf; 4150 4151 /* 4152 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain 4153 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed. 4154 */ 4155 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2)); 4156 if (envbuf != NULL) 4157 { 4158 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val); 4159 putenv((char *)envbuf); 4160 } 4161 #endif 4162 } 4163 4164 #if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO) 4165 /* 4166 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name. 4167 */ 4168 char_u * 4169 get_env_name(xp, idx) 4170 expand_T *xp UNUSED; 4171 int idx; 4172 { 4173 # if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__) 4174 /* 4175 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW). 4176 */ 4177 return NULL; 4178 # else 4179 # ifndef __WIN32__ 4180 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */ 4181 extern char **environ; 4182 # endif 4183 # define ENVNAMELEN 100 4184 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN]; 4185 char_u *str; 4186 int n; 4187 4188 str = (char_u *)environ[idx]; 4189 if (str == NULL) 4190 return NULL; 4191 4192 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n) 4193 { 4194 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL) 4195 break; 4196 name[n] = str[n]; 4197 } 4198 name[n] = NUL; 4199 return name; 4200 # endif 4201 } 4202 #endif 4203 4204 /* 4205 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in 4206 * 'src'. 4207 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src. 4208 */ 4209 void 4210 home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one) 4211 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */ 4212 char_u *src; /* input file name */ 4213 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 4214 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 4215 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include 4216 spaces and commas in the file name. */ 4217 { 4218 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0; 4219 size_t len; 4220 char_u *homedir_env; 4221 char_u *p; 4222 4223 if (src == NULL) 4224 { 4225 *dst = NUL; 4226 return; 4227 } 4228 4229 /* 4230 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely. 4231 */ 4232 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help) 4233 { 4234 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src)); 4235 return; 4236 } 4237 4238 /* 4239 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the 4240 * "real" home directory. 4241 */ 4242 if (homedir != NULL) 4243 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir); 4244 4245 #ifdef VMS 4246 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN"); 4247 #else 4248 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME"); 4249 #endif 4250 4251 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL) 4252 homedir_env = NULL; 4253 if (homedir_env != NULL) 4254 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env); 4255 4256 if (!one) 4257 src = skipwhite(src); 4258 while (*src && dstlen > 0) 4259 { 4260 /* 4261 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name. 4262 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches 4263 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/' 4264 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla", 4265 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up 4266 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user 4267 * er's home directory)). 4268 */ 4269 p = homedir; 4270 len = dirlen; 4271 for (;;) 4272 { 4273 if ( len 4274 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0 4275 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len]) 4276 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' ')) 4277 || src[len] == NUL)) 4278 { 4279 src += len; 4280 if (--dstlen > 0) 4281 *dst++ = '~'; 4282 4283 /* 4284 * If it's just the home directory, add "/". 4285 */ 4286 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0) 4287 *dst++ = '/'; 4288 break; 4289 } 4290 if (p == homedir_env) 4291 break; 4292 p = homedir_env; 4293 len = envlen; 4294 } 4295 4296 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */ 4297 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0) 4298 *dst++ = *src++; 4299 /* skip separator */ 4300 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0) 4301 *dst++ = *src++; 4302 } 4303 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */ 4304 4305 *dst = NUL; 4306 } 4307 4308 /* 4309 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory. 4310 * When something fails, NULL is returned. 4311 */ 4312 char_u * 4313 home_replace_save(buf, src) 4314 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */ 4315 char_u *src; /* input file name */ 4316 { 4317 char_u *dst; 4318 unsigned len; 4319 4320 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */ 4321 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */ 4322 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src); 4323 dst = alloc(len); 4324 if (dst != NULL) 4325 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE); 4326 return dst; 4327 } 4328 4329 /* 4330 * Compare two file names and return: 4331 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file. 4332 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name. 4333 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files. 4334 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist. 4335 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist. 4336 * For the first name environment variables are expanded 4337 */ 4338 int 4339 fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname) 4340 char_u *s1, *s2; 4341 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */ 4342 { 4343 #ifdef UNIX 4344 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL]; 4345 char_u full1[MAXPATHL]; 4346 char_u full2[MAXPATHL]; 4347 struct stat st1, st2; 4348 int r1, r2; 4349 4350 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL); 4351 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1); 4352 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2); 4353 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0) 4354 { 4355 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */ 4356 if (checkname) 4357 { 4358 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0) 4359 return FPC_SAMEX; 4360 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4361 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4362 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0) 4363 return FPC_SAMEX; 4364 } 4365 return FPC_NOTX; 4366 } 4367 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0) 4368 return FPC_DIFFX; 4369 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino) 4370 return FPC_SAME; 4371 return FPC_DIFF; 4372 #else 4373 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */ 4374 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */ 4375 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */ 4376 int retval = FPC_DIFF; 4377 int r1, r2; 4378 4379 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */ 4380 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL) 4381 { 4382 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL; 4383 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL; 4384 4385 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL); 4386 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4387 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4388 4389 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */ 4390 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK) 4391 { 4392 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0) 4393 retval = FPC_SAMEX; 4394 else 4395 retval = FPC_NOTX; 4396 } 4397 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK) 4398 retval = FPC_DIFFX; 4399 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2)) 4400 retval = FPC_DIFF; 4401 else 4402 retval = FPC_SAME; 4403 vim_free(exp1); 4404 } 4405 return retval; 4406 #endif 4407 } 4408 4409 /* 4410 * Get the tail of a path: the file name. 4411 * Fail safe: never returns NULL. 4412 */ 4413 char_u * 4414 gettail(fname) 4415 char_u *fname; 4416 { 4417 char_u *p1, *p2; 4418 4419 if (fname == NULL) 4420 return (char_u *)""; 4421 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */ 4422 { 4423 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2)) 4424 p1 = p2 + 1; 4425 mb_ptr_adv(p2); 4426 } 4427 return p1; 4428 } 4429 4430 /* 4431 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL 4432 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//". 4433 * Always returns a valid pointer. 4434 */ 4435 char_u * 4436 gettail_sep(fname) 4437 char_u *fname; 4438 { 4439 char_u *p; 4440 char_u *t; 4441 4442 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */ 4443 t = gettail(fname); 4444 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t)) 4445 --t; 4446 #ifdef VMS 4447 /* path separator is part of the path */ 4448 ++t; 4449 #endif 4450 return t; 4451 } 4452 4453 /* 4454 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator). 4455 */ 4456 char_u * 4457 getnextcomp(fname) 4458 char_u *fname; 4459 { 4460 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname)) 4461 mb_ptr_adv(fname); 4462 if (*fname) 4463 ++fname; 4464 return fname; 4465 } 4466 4467 /* 4468 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name. 4469 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head. 4470 * If there is no head, path is returned. 4471 */ 4472 char_u * 4473 get_past_head(path) 4474 char_u *path; 4475 { 4476 char_u *retval; 4477 4478 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 4479 /* may skip "c:" */ 4480 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':') 4481 retval = path + 2; 4482 else 4483 retval = path; 4484 #else 4485 # if defined(AMIGA) 4486 /* may skip "label:" */ 4487 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':'); 4488 if (retval == NULL) 4489 retval = path; 4490 # else /* Unix */ 4491 retval = path; 4492 # endif 4493 #endif 4494 4495 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval)) 4496 ++retval; 4497 4498 return retval; 4499 } 4500 4501 /* 4502 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator. 4503 */ 4504 int 4505 vim_ispathsep(c) 4506 int c; 4507 { 4508 #ifdef RISCOS 4509 return (c == '.' || c == ':'); 4510 #else 4511 # ifdef UNIX 4512 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */ 4513 # else 4514 # ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 4515 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\'); 4516 # else 4517 # ifdef VMS 4518 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */ 4519 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/' 4520 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' ); 4521 # else /* Amiga */ 4522 return (c == ':' || c == '/'); 4523 # endif /* VMS */ 4524 # endif 4525 # endif 4526 #endif /* RISC OS */ 4527 } 4528 4529 #if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO) 4530 /* 4531 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator. 4532 */ 4533 int 4534 vim_ispathlistsep(c) 4535 int c; 4536 { 4537 #ifdef UNIX 4538 return (c == ':'); 4539 #else 4540 return (c == ';'); /* might not be right for every system... */ 4541 #endif 4542 } 4543 #endif 4544 4545 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) \ 4546 || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) 4547 /* 4548 * Shorten the path of a file from "~/foo/../.bar/fname" to "~/f/../.b/fname" 4549 * It's done in-place. 4550 */ 4551 void 4552 shorten_dir(str) 4553 char_u *str; 4554 { 4555 char_u *tail, *s, *d; 4556 int skip = FALSE; 4557 4558 tail = gettail(str); 4559 d = str; 4560 for (s = str; ; ++s) 4561 { 4562 if (s >= tail) /* copy the whole tail */ 4563 { 4564 *d++ = *s; 4565 if (*s == NUL) 4566 break; 4567 } 4568 else if (vim_ispathsep(*s)) /* copy '/' and next char */ 4569 { 4570 *d++ = *s; 4571 skip = FALSE; 4572 } 4573 else if (!skip) 4574 { 4575 *d++ = *s; /* copy next char */ 4576 if (*s != '~' && *s != '.') /* and leading "~" and "." */ 4577 skip = TRUE; 4578 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 4579 if (has_mbyte) 4580 { 4581 int l = mb_ptr2len(s); 4582 4583 while (--l > 0) 4584 *d++ = *++s; 4585 } 4586 # endif 4587 } 4588 } 4589 } 4590 #endif 4591 4592 /* 4593 * Return TRUE if the directory of "fname" exists, FALSE otherwise. 4594 * Also returns TRUE if there is no directory name. 4595 * "fname" must be writable!. 4596 */ 4597 int 4598 dir_of_file_exists(fname) 4599 char_u *fname; 4600 { 4601 char_u *p; 4602 int c; 4603 int retval; 4604 4605 p = gettail_sep(fname); 4606 if (p == fname) 4607 return TRUE; 4608 c = *p; 4609 *p = NUL; 4610 retval = mch_isdir(fname); 4611 *p = c; 4612 return retval; 4613 } 4614 4615 #if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \ 4616 || defined(PROTO) 4617 /* 4618 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally. 4619 */ 4620 int 4621 vim_fnamecmp(x, y) 4622 char_u *x, *y; 4623 { 4624 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL); 4625 } 4626 4627 int 4628 vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len) 4629 char_u *x, *y; 4630 size_t len; 4631 { 4632 while (len > 0 && *x && *y) 4633 { 4634 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y) 4635 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\') 4636 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/')) 4637 break; 4638 ++x; 4639 ++y; 4640 --len; 4641 } 4642 if (len == 0) 4643 return 0; 4644 return (*x - *y); 4645 } 4646 #endif 4647 4648 /* 4649 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory. 4650 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is necessary. 4651 */ 4652 char_u * 4653 concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep) 4654 char_u *fname1; 4655 char_u *fname2; 4656 int sep; 4657 { 4658 char_u *dest; 4659 4660 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3)); 4661 if (dest != NULL) 4662 { 4663 STRCPY(dest, fname1); 4664 if (sep) 4665 add_pathsep(dest); 4666 STRCAT(dest, fname2); 4667 } 4668 return dest; 4669 } 4670 4671 /* 4672 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory. 4673 * Returns NULL when out of memory. 4674 */ 4675 char_u * 4676 concat_str(str1, str2) 4677 char_u *str1; 4678 char_u *str2; 4679 { 4680 char_u *dest; 4681 size_t l = STRLEN(str1); 4682 4683 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L)); 4684 if (dest != NULL) 4685 { 4686 STRCPY(dest, str1); 4687 STRCPY(dest + l, str2); 4688 } 4689 return dest; 4690 } 4691 4692 /* 4693 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path 4694 * separator. 4695 */ 4696 void 4697 add_pathsep(p) 4698 char_u *p; 4699 { 4700 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p))) 4701 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR); 4702 } 4703 4704 /* 4705 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name. 4706 * Returns NULL when out of memory. 4707 */ 4708 char_u * 4709 FullName_save(fname, force) 4710 char_u *fname; 4711 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks 4712 like a full path name */ 4713 { 4714 char_u *buf; 4715 char_u *new_fname = NULL; 4716 4717 if (fname == NULL) 4718 return NULL; 4719 4720 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL); 4721 if (buf != NULL) 4722 { 4723 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL) 4724 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf); 4725 else 4726 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname); 4727 vim_free(buf); 4728 } 4729 return new_fname; 4730 } 4731 4732 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL) 4733 4734 static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p)); 4735 4736 /* 4737 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now. 4738 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards. 4739 */ 4740 pos_T * 4741 find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 4742 int ind_maxcomment; 4743 { 4744 pos_T *pos; 4745 char_u *line; 4746 char_u *p; 4747 int cur_maxcomment = ind_maxcomment; 4748 4749 for (;;) 4750 { 4751 pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, cur_maxcomment); 4752 if (pos == NULL) 4753 break; 4754 4755 /* 4756 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string. 4757 * If it is then restrict the search to below this line and try again. 4758 */ 4759 line = ml_get(pos->lnum); 4760 for (p = line; *p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p) 4761 p = skip_string(p); 4762 if ((colnr_T)(p - line) <= pos->col) 4763 break; 4764 cur_maxcomment = curwin->w_cursor.lnum - pos->lnum - 1; 4765 if (cur_maxcomment <= 0) 4766 { 4767 pos = NULL; 4768 break; 4769 } 4770 } 4771 return pos; 4772 } 4773 4774 /* 4775 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character. 4776 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified. 4777 */ 4778 static char_u * 4779 skip_string(p) 4780 char_u *p; 4781 { 4782 int i; 4783 4784 /* 4785 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time". 4786 */ 4787 for ( ; ; ++p) 4788 { 4789 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */ 4790 { 4791 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */ 4792 break; 4793 i = 2; 4794 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */ 4795 { 4796 ++i; 4797 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */ 4798 ++i; 4799 } 4800 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */ 4801 { 4802 p += i; 4803 continue; 4804 } 4805 } 4806 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */ 4807 { 4808 for (++p; p[0]; ++p) 4809 { 4810 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL) 4811 ++p; 4812 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */ 4813 break; 4814 } 4815 if (p[0] == '"') 4816 continue; 4817 } 4818 break; /* no string found */ 4819 } 4820 if (!*p) 4821 --p; /* backup from NUL */ 4822 return p; 4823 } 4824 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */ 4825 4826 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO) 4827 4828 /* 4829 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line. 4830 */ 4831 void 4832 do_c_expr_indent() 4833 { 4834 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL 4835 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL) 4836 fixthisline(get_expr_indent); 4837 else 4838 # endif 4839 fixthisline(get_c_indent); 4840 } 4841 4842 /* 4843 * Functions for C-indenting. 4844 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer. 4845 */ 4846 /* 4847 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line. 4848 */ 4849 4850 static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4851 static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *)); 4852 static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void)); 4853 static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **)); 4854 static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *)); 4855 static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l)); 4856 static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum)); 4857 static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment)); 4858 static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void)); 4859 static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum)); 4860 static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *)); 4861 static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump)); 4862 static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4863 static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4864 static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int)); 4865 static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void)); 4866 static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T)); 4867 static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *)); 4868 static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *)); 4869 static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *)); 4870 static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int)); 4871 static int cin_iswhileofdo_end __ARGS((int terminated, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment)); 4872 static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *)); 4873 static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((colnr_T *col)); 4874 static int get_baseclass_amount __ARGS((int col, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment, int ind_cpp_baseclass)); 4875 static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *)); 4876 static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos)); 4877 static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int)); 4878 static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int)); 4879 static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos)); 4880 static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end)); 4881 static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment)); 4882 4883 static int ind_hash_comment = 0; /* # starts a comment */ 4884 4885 /* 4886 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line. 4887 * Also skip over Perl/shell comments if desired. 4888 */ 4889 static char_u * 4890 cin_skipcomment(s) 4891 char_u *s; 4892 { 4893 while (*s) 4894 { 4895 char_u *prev_s = s; 4896 4897 s = skipwhite(s); 4898 4899 /* Perl/shell # comment comment continues until eol. Require a space 4900 * before # to avoid recognizing $#array. */ 4901 if (ind_hash_comment != 0 && s != prev_s && *s == '#') 4902 { 4903 s += STRLEN(s); 4904 break; 4905 } 4906 if (*s != '/') 4907 break; 4908 ++s; 4909 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */ 4910 { 4911 s += STRLEN(s); 4912 break; 4913 } 4914 if (*s != '*') 4915 break; 4916 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */ 4917 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/') 4918 { 4919 s += 2; 4920 break; 4921 } 4922 } 4923 return s; 4924 } 4925 4926 /* 4927 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are 4928 * not considered code. 4929 */ 4930 static int 4931 cin_nocode(s) 4932 char_u *s; 4933 { 4934 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL; 4935 } 4936 4937 /* 4938 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines. 4939 */ 4940 static pos_T * 4941 find_line_comment() /* XXX */ 4942 { 4943 static pos_T pos; 4944 char_u *line; 4945 char_u *p; 4946 4947 pos = curwin->w_cursor; 4948 while (--pos.lnum > 0) 4949 { 4950 line = ml_get(pos.lnum); 4951 p = skipwhite(line); 4952 if (cin_islinecomment(p)) 4953 { 4954 pos.col = (int)(p - line); 4955 return &pos; 4956 } 4957 if (*p != NUL) 4958 break; 4959 } 4960 return NULL; 4961 } 4962 4963 /* 4964 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true. 4965 */ 4966 static int 4967 cin_islabel_skip(s) 4968 char_u **s; 4969 { 4970 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */ 4971 return FALSE; 4972 4973 while (vim_isIDc(**s)) 4974 (*s)++; 4975 4976 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s); 4977 4978 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */ 4979 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':'); 4980 } 4981 4982 /* 4983 * Recognize a label: "label:". 4984 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label. 4985 */ 4986 int 4987 cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 4988 int ind_maxcomment; 4989 { 4990 char_u *s; 4991 4992 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 4993 4994 /* 4995 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented 4996 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations. 4997 */ 4998 if (cin_isdefault(s)) 4999 return FALSE; 5000 if (cin_isscopedecl(s)) 5001 return FALSE; 5002 5003 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s)) 5004 { 5005 /* 5006 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case 5007 * label. 5008 */ 5009 pos_T cursor_save; 5010 pos_T *trypos; 5011 char_u *line; 5012 5013 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5014 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 5015 { 5016 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5017 5018 /* 5019 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 5020 */ 5021 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 5022 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */ 5023 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 5024 5025 line = ml_get_curline(); 5026 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */ 5027 continue; 5028 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL) 5029 continue; 5030 5031 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5032 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE) 5033 || cin_isscopedecl(line) 5034 || cin_iscase(line) 5035 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line))) 5036 return TRUE; 5037 return FALSE; 5038 } 5039 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5040 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */ 5041 } 5042 return FALSE; 5043 } 5044 5045 /* 5046 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations. 5047 * Q&D-Implementation: 5048 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line. 5049 */ 5050 static int 5051 cin_isinit(void) 5052 { 5053 char_u *s; 5054 5055 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 5056 5057 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7])) 5058 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7); 5059 5060 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4])) 5061 return TRUE; 5062 5063 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{")) 5064 return TRUE; 5065 5066 return FALSE; 5067 } 5068 5069 /* 5070 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:". 5071 */ 5072 int 5073 cin_iscase(s) 5074 char_u *s; 5075 { 5076 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5077 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4])) 5078 { 5079 for (s += 4; *s; ++s) 5080 { 5081 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5082 if (*s == ':') 5083 { 5084 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */ 5085 ++s; 5086 else 5087 return TRUE; 5088 } 5089 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'') 5090 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */ 5091 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/')) 5092 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */ 5093 else if (*s == '"') 5094 return FALSE; /* stop at string */ 5095 } 5096 return FALSE; 5097 } 5098 5099 if (cin_isdefault(s)) 5100 return TRUE; 5101 return FALSE; 5102 } 5103 5104 /* 5105 * Recognize a "default" switch label. 5106 */ 5107 static int 5108 cin_isdefault(s) 5109 char_u *s; 5110 { 5111 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0 5112 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':' 5113 && s[1] != ':'); 5114 } 5115 5116 /* 5117 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label. 5118 */ 5119 int 5120 cin_isscopedecl(s) 5121 char_u *s; 5122 { 5123 int i; 5124 5125 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5126 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0) 5127 i = 6; 5128 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0) 5129 i = 9; 5130 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0) 5131 i = 7; 5132 else 5133 return FALSE; 5134 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':'); 5135 } 5136 5137 /* 5138 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'. 5139 * Return NULL if not found. 5140 * case 234: a = b; 5141 * ^ 5142 */ 5143 static char_u * 5144 after_label(l) 5145 char_u *l; 5146 { 5147 for ( ; *l; ++l) 5148 { 5149 if (*l == ':') 5150 { 5151 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */ 5152 ++l; 5153 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1)) 5154 break; 5155 } 5156 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'') 5157 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */ 5158 } 5159 if (*l == NUL) 5160 return NULL; 5161 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1); 5162 if (*l == NUL) 5163 return NULL; 5164 return l; 5165 } 5166 5167 /* 5168 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label. 5169 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label. 5170 */ 5171 static int 5172 get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */ 5173 linenr_T lnum; 5174 { 5175 char_u *l; 5176 pos_T fp; 5177 colnr_T col; 5178 char_u *p; 5179 5180 l = ml_get(lnum); 5181 p = after_label(l); 5182 if (p == NULL) 5183 return 0; 5184 5185 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l); 5186 fp.lnum = lnum; 5187 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5188 return (int)col; 5189 } 5190 5191 /* 5192 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label. 5193 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label) in "pp". 5194 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf) 5195 * ^ 5196 */ 5197 static int 5198 skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment) 5199 linenr_T lnum; 5200 char_u **pp; 5201 int ind_maxcomment; 5202 { 5203 char_u *l; 5204 int amount; 5205 pos_T cursor_save; 5206 5207 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5208 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 5209 l = ml_get_curline(); 5210 /* XXX */ 5211 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) 5212 { 5213 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum); 5214 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 5215 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */ 5216 l = ml_get_curline(); 5217 } 5218 else 5219 { 5220 amount = get_indent(); 5221 l = ml_get_curline(); 5222 } 5223 *pp = l; 5224 5225 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5226 return amount; 5227 } 5228 5229 /* 5230 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration. 5231 * int a, indent of "a" 5232 * static struct foo b, indent of "b" 5233 * enum bla c, indent of "c" 5234 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration. 5235 */ 5236 static int 5237 cin_first_id_amount() 5238 { 5239 char_u *line, *p, *s; 5240 int len; 5241 pos_T fp; 5242 colnr_T col; 5243 5244 line = ml_get_curline(); 5245 p = skipwhite(line); 5246 len = (int)(skiptowhite(p) - p); 5247 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0) 5248 { 5249 p = skipwhite(p + 6); 5250 len = (int)(skiptowhite(p) - p); 5251 } 5252 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0) 5253 p = skipwhite(p + 6); 5254 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0) 5255 p = skipwhite(p + 4); 5256 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0) 5257 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0)) 5258 { 5259 s = skipwhite(p + len); 5260 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3])) 5261 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])) 5262 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5])) 5263 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))) 5264 p = s; 5265 } 5266 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len) 5267 ; 5268 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p)) 5269 return 0; 5270 5271 p = skipwhite(p + len); 5272 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5273 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line); 5274 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5275 return (int)col; 5276 } 5277 5278 /* 5279 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign. 5280 * char *foo = "here"; 5281 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found. 5282 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash. 5283 * foo = "asdf\ 5284 * asdf\ 5285 * here"; 5286 */ 5287 static int 5288 cin_get_equal_amount(lnum) 5289 linenr_T lnum; 5290 { 5291 char_u *line; 5292 char_u *s; 5293 colnr_T col; 5294 pos_T fp; 5295 5296 if (lnum > 1) 5297 { 5298 line = ml_get(lnum - 1); 5299 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\') 5300 return -1; 5301 } 5302 5303 line = s = ml_get(lnum); 5304 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL) 5305 { 5306 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5307 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5308 else 5309 ++s; 5310 } 5311 if (*s != '=') 5312 return 0; 5313 5314 s = skipwhite(s + 1); 5315 if (cin_nocode(s)) 5316 return 0; 5317 5318 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */ 5319 ++s; 5320 5321 fp.lnum = lnum; 5322 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line); 5323 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5324 return (int)col; 5325 } 5326 5327 /* 5328 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'. 5329 */ 5330 static int 5331 cin_ispreproc(s) 5332 char_u *s; 5333 { 5334 s = skipwhite(s); 5335 if (*s == '#') 5336 return TRUE; 5337 return FALSE; 5338 } 5339 5340 /* 5341 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a 5342 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the 5343 * start and return the line in "*pp". 5344 */ 5345 static int 5346 cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump) 5347 char_u **pp; 5348 linenr_T *lnump; 5349 { 5350 char_u *line = *pp; 5351 linenr_T lnum = *lnump; 5352 int retval = FALSE; 5353 5354 for (;;) 5355 { 5356 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) 5357 { 5358 retval = TRUE; 5359 *lnump = lnum; 5360 break; 5361 } 5362 if (lnum == 1) 5363 break; 5364 line = ml_get(--lnum); 5365 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\') 5366 break; 5367 } 5368 5369 if (lnum != *lnump) 5370 *pp = ml_get(*lnump); 5371 return retval; 5372 } 5373 5374 /* 5375 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment. 5376 */ 5377 static int 5378 cin_iscomment(p) 5379 char_u *p; 5380 { 5381 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/')); 5382 } 5383 5384 /* 5385 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment. 5386 */ 5387 static int 5388 cin_islinecomment(p) 5389 char_u *p; 5390 { 5391 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/'); 5392 } 5393 5394 /* 5395 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'. 5396 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line. 5397 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if 5398 * both apply in order to determine initializations). 5399 */ 5400 static int 5401 cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma) 5402 char_u *s; 5403 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */ 5404 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */ 5405 { 5406 char_u found_start = 0; 5407 5408 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5409 5410 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s))) 5411 found_start = *s; 5412 5413 while (*s) 5414 { 5415 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */ 5416 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s)); 5417 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}' 5418 || (incl_comma && *s == ',')) 5419 && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5420 return *s; 5421 5422 if (*s) 5423 s++; 5424 } 5425 return found_start; 5426 } 5427 5428 /* 5429 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to 5430 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and 5431 * no semicolons anywhere. 5432 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line. 5433 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must 5434 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here. 5435 * "lnum" is where we start looking. 5436 */ 5437 static int 5438 cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum) 5439 char_u **sp; 5440 linenr_T first_lnum; 5441 { 5442 char_u *s; 5443 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum; 5444 int retval = FALSE; 5445 5446 if (sp == NULL) 5447 s = ml_get(lnum); 5448 else 5449 s = *sp; 5450 5451 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"') 5452 { 5453 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5454 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5455 else 5456 ++s; 5457 } 5458 if (*s != '(') 5459 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */ 5460 5461 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"') 5462 { 5463 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5464 { 5465 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match 5466 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash: 5467 * #if defined(x) && \ 5468 * defined(y) 5469 */ 5470 lnum = first_lnum - 1; 5471 s = ml_get(lnum); 5472 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\') 5473 retval = TRUE; 5474 goto done; 5475 } 5476 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5477 { 5478 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */ 5479 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 5480 break; 5481 5482 s = ml_get(++lnum); 5483 } 5484 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5485 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5486 else 5487 ++s; 5488 } 5489 5490 done: 5491 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL) 5492 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum); 5493 5494 return retval; 5495 } 5496 5497 static int 5498 cin_isif(p) 5499 char_u *p; 5500 { 5501 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2])); 5502 } 5503 5504 static int 5505 cin_iselse(p) 5506 char_u *p; 5507 { 5508 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */ 5509 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1); 5510 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4])); 5511 } 5512 5513 static int 5514 cin_isdo(p) 5515 char_u *p; 5516 { 5517 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2])); 5518 } 5519 5520 /* 5521 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do". 5522 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the 5523 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines. 5524 */ 5525 static int 5526 cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */ 5527 char_u *p; 5528 linenr_T lnum; 5529 int ind_maxparen; 5530 { 5531 pos_T cursor_save; 5532 pos_T *trypos; 5533 int retval = FALSE; 5534 5535 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5536 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */ 5537 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1); 5538 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5])) 5539 { 5540 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5541 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 5542 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 5543 p = ml_get_curline(); 5544 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */ 5545 { 5546 ++p; 5547 ++curwin->w_cursor.col; 5548 } 5549 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL 5550 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';') 5551 retval = TRUE; 5552 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5553 } 5554 return retval; 5555 } 5556 5557 /* 5558 * Return TRUE if we are at the end of a do-while. 5559 * do 5560 * nothing; 5561 * while (foo 5562 * && bar); <-- here 5563 * Adjust the cursor to the line with "while". 5564 */ 5565 static int 5566 cin_iswhileofdo_end(terminated, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) 5567 int terminated; 5568 int ind_maxparen; 5569 int ind_maxcomment; 5570 { 5571 char_u *line; 5572 char_u *p; 5573 char_u *s; 5574 pos_T *trypos; 5575 int i; 5576 5577 if (terminated != ';') /* there must be a ';' at the end */ 5578 return FALSE; 5579 5580 p = line = ml_get_curline(); 5581 while (*p != NUL) 5582 { 5583 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5584 if (*p == ')') 5585 { 5586 s = skipwhite(p + 1); 5587 if (*s == ';' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5588 { 5589 /* Found ");" at end of the line, now check there is "while" 5590 * before the matching '('. XXX */ 5591 i = (int)(p - line); 5592 curwin->w_cursor.col = i; 5593 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment); 5594 if (trypos != NULL) 5595 { 5596 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get(trypos->lnum)); 5597 if (*s == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */ 5598 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5599 if (STRNCMP(s, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5])) 5600 { 5601 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 5602 return TRUE; 5603 } 5604 } 5605 5606 /* Searching may have made "line" invalid, get it again. */ 5607 line = ml_get_curline(); 5608 p = line + i; 5609 } 5610 } 5611 if (*p != NUL) 5612 ++p; 5613 } 5614 return FALSE; 5615 } 5616 5617 static int 5618 cin_isbreak(p) 5619 char_u *p; 5620 { 5621 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5])); 5622 } 5623 5624 /* 5625 * Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or 5626 * constructor-initialization. eg: 5627 * 5628 * class MyClass : 5629 * baseClass <-- here 5630 * class MyClass : public baseClass, 5631 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??) 5632 * MyClass::MyClass(...) : 5633 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization) 5634 * 5635 * This is a lot of guessing. Watch out for "cond ? func() : foo". 5636 */ 5637 static int 5638 cin_is_cpp_baseclass(col) 5639 colnr_T *col; /* return: column to align with */ 5640 { 5641 char_u *s; 5642 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class; 5643 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5644 char_u *line = ml_get_curline(); 5645 5646 *col = 0; 5647 5648 s = skipwhite(line); 5649 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */ 5650 return FALSE; 5651 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5652 if (*s == NUL) 5653 return FALSE; 5654 5655 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5656 5657 /* Search for a line starting with '#', empty, ending in ';' or containing 5658 * '{' or '}' and start below it. This handles the following situations: 5659 * a = cond ? 5660 * func() : 5661 * asdf; 5662 * func::foo() 5663 * : something 5664 * {} 5665 * Foo::Foo (int one, int two) 5666 * : something(4), 5667 * somethingelse(3) 5668 * {} 5669 */ 5670 while (lnum > 1) 5671 { 5672 line = ml_get(lnum - 1); 5673 s = skipwhite(line); 5674 if (*s == '#' || *s == NUL) 5675 break; 5676 while (*s != NUL) 5677 { 5678 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5679 if (*s == '{' || *s == '}' 5680 || (*s == ';' && cin_nocode(s + 1))) 5681 break; 5682 if (*s != NUL) 5683 ++s; 5684 } 5685 if (*s != NUL) 5686 break; 5687 --lnum; 5688 } 5689 5690 line = ml_get(lnum); 5691 s = cin_skipcomment(line); 5692 for (;;) 5693 { 5694 if (*s == NUL) 5695 { 5696 if (lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum) 5697 break; 5698 /* Continue in the cursor line. */ 5699 line = ml_get(++lnum); 5700 s = cin_skipcomment(line); 5701 if (*s == NUL) 5702 continue; 5703 } 5704 5705 if (s[0] == ':') 5706 { 5707 if (s[1] == ':') 5708 { 5709 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor 5710 * initialization any more */ 5711 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5712 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2); 5713 } 5714 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct) 5715 { 5716 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of 5717 * cpp-base-class-declaration or constructor-initialization */ 5718 cpp_base_class = TRUE; 5719 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5720 *col = 0; 5721 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5722 } 5723 else 5724 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5725 } 5726 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5])) 5727 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6]))) 5728 { 5729 class_or_struct = TRUE; 5730 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5731 5732 if (*s == 'c') 5733 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5); 5734 else 5735 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6); 5736 } 5737 else 5738 { 5739 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';') 5740 { 5741 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5742 } 5743 else if (s[0] == ')') 5744 { 5745 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across 5746 * something like "):" */ 5747 class_or_struct = FALSE; 5748 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE; 5749 } 5750 else if (s[0] == '?') 5751 { 5752 /* Avoid seeing '() :' after '?' as constructor init. */ 5753 return FALSE; 5754 } 5755 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0])) 5756 { 5757 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */ 5758 class_or_struct = FALSE; 5759 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5760 } 5761 else if (*col == 0) 5762 { 5763 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */ 5764 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5765 5766 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */ 5767 if (cpp_base_class) 5768 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line); 5769 } 5770 5771 /* When the line ends in a comma don't align with it. */ 5772 if (lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum && *s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5773 *col = 0; 5774 5775 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5776 } 5777 } 5778 5779 return cpp_base_class; 5780 } 5781 5782 static int 5783 get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass) 5784 int col; 5785 int ind_maxparen; 5786 int ind_maxcomment; 5787 int ind_cpp_baseclass; 5788 { 5789 int amount; 5790 colnr_T vcol; 5791 pos_T *trypos; 5792 5793 if (col == 0) 5794 { 5795 amount = get_indent(); 5796 if (find_last_paren(ml_get_curline(), '(', ')') 5797 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 5798 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 5799 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */ 5800 if (!cin_ends_in(ml_get_curline(), (char_u *)",", NULL)) 5801 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass; 5802 } 5803 else 5804 { 5805 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 5806 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &vcol, NULL, NULL); 5807 amount = (int)vcol; 5808 } 5809 if (amount < ind_cpp_baseclass) 5810 amount = ind_cpp_baseclass; 5811 return amount; 5812 } 5813 5814 /* 5815 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by 5816 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments. 5817 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL. 5818 */ 5819 static int 5820 cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore) 5821 char_u *s; 5822 char_u *find; 5823 char_u *ignore; 5824 { 5825 char_u *p = s; 5826 char_u *r; 5827 int len = (int)STRLEN(find); 5828 5829 while (*p != NUL) 5830 { 5831 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5832 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0) 5833 { 5834 r = skipwhite(p + len); 5835 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0) 5836 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore)); 5837 if (cin_nocode(r)) 5838 return TRUE; 5839 } 5840 if (*p != NUL) 5841 ++p; 5842 } 5843 return FALSE; 5844 } 5845 5846 /* 5847 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos". 5848 * Return the column found. 5849 */ 5850 static int 5851 cin_skip2pos(trypos) 5852 pos_T *trypos; 5853 { 5854 char_u *line; 5855 char_u *p; 5856 5857 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum); 5858 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col) 5859 { 5860 if (cin_iscomment(p)) 5861 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5862 else 5863 { 5864 p = skip_string(p); 5865 ++p; 5866 } 5867 } 5868 return (int)(p - line); 5869 } 5870 5871 /* 5872 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in. 5873 * Return NULL if no match found. 5874 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines 5875 * work. */ 5876 /* foo() */ 5877 /* { */ 5878 /* } */ 5879 5880 static pos_T * 5881 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 5882 int ind_maxcomment; 5883 { 5884 pos_T cursor_save; 5885 pos_T *trypos; 5886 pos_T *pos; 5887 static pos_T pos_copy; 5888 5889 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5890 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL) 5891 { 5892 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */ 5893 trypos = &pos_copy; 5894 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 5895 pos = NULL; 5896 /* ignore the { if it's in a // or / * * / comment */ 5897 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col 5898 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */ 5899 break; 5900 if (pos != NULL) 5901 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 5902 } 5903 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5904 return trypos; 5905 } 5906 5907 /* 5908 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment. 5909 * Return NULL of no match found. 5910 */ 5911 static pos_T * 5912 find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 5913 int ind_maxparen; 5914 int ind_maxcomment; 5915 { 5916 pos_T cursor_save; 5917 pos_T *trypos; 5918 static pos_T pos_copy; 5919 5920 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5921 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL) 5922 { 5923 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */ 5924 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col) 5925 trypos = NULL; 5926 else 5927 { 5928 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */ 5929 trypos = &pos_copy; 5930 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 5931 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */ 5932 trypos = NULL; 5933 } 5934 } 5935 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5936 return trypos; 5937 } 5938 5939 /* 5940 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the 5941 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a 5942 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of 5943 * looking a few lines further. 5944 */ 5945 static int 5946 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos) 5947 int ind_maxparen; 5948 pos_T *startpos; 5949 { 5950 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5951 5952 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2) 5953 return ind_maxparen - (int)n; 5954 return ind_maxparen; 5955 } 5956 5957 /* 5958 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in 5959 * line "l". 5960 */ 5961 static int 5962 find_last_paren(l, start, end) 5963 char_u *l; 5964 int start, end; 5965 { 5966 int i; 5967 int retval = FALSE; 5968 int open_count = 0; 5969 5970 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */ 5971 5972 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++) 5973 { 5974 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */ 5975 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */ 5976 if (l[i] == start) 5977 ++open_count; 5978 else if (l[i] == end) 5979 { 5980 if (open_count > 0) 5981 --open_count; 5982 else 5983 { 5984 curwin->w_cursor.col = i; 5985 retval = TRUE; 5986 } 5987 } 5988 } 5989 return retval; 5990 } 5991 5992 int 5993 get_c_indent() 5994 { 5995 /* 5996 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that 5997 * block should be 5998 */ 5999 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw; 6000 6001 /* 6002 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a 6003 * line is imagined to be. 6004 */ 6005 int ind_open_imag = 0; 6006 6007 /* 6008 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by 6009 * an opening brace. 6010 */ 6011 int ind_no_brace = 0; 6012 6013 /* 6014 * column where the first { of a function should be located } 6015 */ 6016 int ind_first_open = 0; 6017 6018 /* 6019 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be 6020 * located 6021 */ 6022 int ind_open_extra = 0; 6023 6024 /* 6025 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left 6026 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close 6027 * brace should be located 6028 */ 6029 int ind_close_extra = 0; 6030 6031 /* 6032 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost 6033 * column is imagined to be 6034 */ 6035 int ind_open_left_imag = 0; 6036 6037 /* 6038 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located 6039 */ 6040 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw; 6041 6042 /* 6043 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located 6044 */ 6045 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw; 6046 6047 /* 6048 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label 6049 */ 6050 int ind_case_break = 0; 6051 6052 /* 6053 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label 6054 * should be located 6055 */ 6056 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw; 6057 6058 /* 6059 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located 6060 */ 6061 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw; 6062 6063 /* 6064 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented 6065 */ 6066 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw; 6067 6068 /* 6069 * amount a function type spec should be indented 6070 */ 6071 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw; 6072 6073 /* 6074 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization 6075 * should be indented 6076 */ 6077 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw; 6078 6079 /* 6080 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line 6081 * should be located 6082 */ 6083 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw; 6084 6085 /* 6086 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses 6087 */ 6088 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2; 6089 6090 /* 6091 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which 6092 * itself is also unclosed 6093 */ 6094 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw; 6095 6096 /* 6097 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an 6098 * unclosed parentheses. 6099 */ 6100 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0; 6101 6102 /* 6103 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and 6104 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer 6105 * context (for very long lines). 6106 */ 6107 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0; 6108 6109 /* 6110 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after 6111 * an unclosed parentheses. 6112 */ 6113 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0; 6114 6115 /* 6116 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching 6117 * opening parentheses. 6118 */ 6119 int ind_matching_paren = 0; 6120 6121 /* 6122 * indent a closing parentheses under the previous line. 6123 */ 6124 int ind_paren_prev = 0; 6125 6126 /* 6127 * Extra indent for comments. 6128 */ 6129 int ind_comment = 0; 6130 6131 /* 6132 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it. 6133 */ 6134 int ind_in_comment = 3; 6135 6136 /* 6137 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something 6138 * after the comment opener. 6139 */ 6140 int ind_in_comment2 = 0; 6141 6142 /* 6143 * max lines to search for an open paren 6144 */ 6145 int ind_maxparen = 20; 6146 6147 /* 6148 * max lines to search for an open comment 6149 */ 6150 int ind_maxcomment = 70; 6151 6152 /* 6153 * handle braces for java code 6154 */ 6155 int ind_java = 0; 6156 6157 /* 6158 * handle blocked cases correctly 6159 */ 6160 int ind_keep_case_label = 0; 6161 6162 pos_T cur_curpos; 6163 int amount; 6164 int scope_amount; 6165 int cur_amount = MAXCOL; 6166 colnr_T col; 6167 char_u *theline; 6168 char_u *linecopy; 6169 pos_T *trypos; 6170 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL; 6171 pos_T our_paren_pos; 6172 char_u *start; 6173 int start_brace; 6174 #define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in column 0 */ 6175 #define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */ 6176 #define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */ 6177 linenr_T ourscope; 6178 char_u *l; 6179 char_u *look; 6180 char_u terminated; 6181 int lookfor; 6182 #define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0 6183 #define LOOKFOR_IF 1 6184 #define LOOKFOR_DO 2 6185 #define LOOKFOR_CASE 3 6186 #define LOOKFOR_ANY 4 6187 #define LOOKFOR_TERM 5 6188 #define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6 6189 #define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7 6190 #define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8 6191 #define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9 6192 #define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10 6193 6194 int whilelevel; 6195 linenr_T lnum; 6196 char_u *options; 6197 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */ 6198 int divider; 6199 int n; 6200 int iscase; 6201 int lookfor_break; 6202 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */ 6203 6204 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; ) 6205 { 6206 l = options++; 6207 if (*options == '-') 6208 ++options; 6209 n = getdigits(&options); 6210 divider = 0; 6211 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */ 6212 { 6213 fraction = atol((char *)++options); 6214 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options)) 6215 { 6216 ++options; 6217 if (divider) 6218 divider *= 10; 6219 else 6220 divider = 10; 6221 } 6222 } 6223 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */ 6224 { 6225 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0) 6226 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */ 6227 else 6228 { 6229 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw; 6230 if (divider) 6231 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider; 6232 } 6233 ++options; 6234 } 6235 if (l[1] == '-') 6236 n = -n; 6237 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in 6238 * doc/indent.txt, and add explanation for it! */ 6239 switch (*l) 6240 { 6241 case '>': ind_level = n; break; 6242 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break; 6243 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break; 6244 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break; 6245 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break; 6246 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break; 6247 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break; 6248 case ':': ind_case = n; break; 6249 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break; 6250 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break; 6251 case 'p': ind_param = n; break; 6252 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break; 6253 case '/': ind_comment = n; break; 6254 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break; 6255 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break; 6256 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break; 6257 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break; 6258 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break; 6259 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break; 6260 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break; 6261 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break; 6262 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break; 6263 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break; 6264 case 'M': ind_paren_prev = n; break; 6265 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break; 6266 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break; 6267 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break; 6268 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break; 6269 case 'j': ind_java = n; break; 6270 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break; 6271 case '#': ind_hash_comment = n; break; 6272 } 6273 if (*options == ',') 6274 ++options; 6275 } 6276 6277 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */ 6278 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor; 6279 6280 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line. 6281 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with 6282 * ml_get is valid! */ 6283 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum)); 6284 if (linecopy == NULL) 6285 return 0; 6286 6287 /* 6288 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the 6289 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when 6290 * inserting new stuff. 6291 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus 6292 * check for that. 6293 */ 6294 if ((State & INSERT) 6295 && curwin->w_cursor.col < (colnr_T)STRLEN(linecopy) 6296 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')') 6297 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 6298 6299 theline = skipwhite(linecopy); 6300 6301 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */ 6302 6303 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 6304 6305 /* 6306 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'. 6307 */ 6308 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE))) 6309 { 6310 amount = 0; 6311 } 6312 6313 /* 6314 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too. 6315 */ 6316 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */ 6317 { 6318 amount = 0; 6319 } 6320 6321 /* 6322 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a 6323 * previous line, lineup with that one. 6324 */ 6325 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline) 6326 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */ 6327 { 6328 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */ 6329 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6330 amount = col; 6331 } 6332 6333 /* 6334 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the 6335 * comment, try using the 'comments' option. 6336 */ 6337 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline) 6338 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */ 6339 { 6340 int lead_start_len = 2; 6341 int lead_middle_len = 1; 6342 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */ 6343 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */ 6344 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */ 6345 char_u *p; 6346 int start_align = 0; 6347 int start_off = 0; 6348 int done = FALSE; 6349 6350 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */ 6351 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6352 amount = col; 6353 6354 p = curbuf->b_p_com; 6355 while (*p != NUL) 6356 { 6357 int align = 0; 6358 int off = 0; 6359 int what = 0; 6360 6361 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':') 6362 { 6363 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE) 6364 what = *p++; 6365 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT) 6366 align = *p++; 6367 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-') 6368 off = getdigits(&p); 6369 else 6370 ++p; 6371 } 6372 6373 if (*p == ':') 6374 ++p; 6375 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 6376 if (what == COM_START) 6377 { 6378 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end); 6379 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start); 6380 start_off = off; 6381 start_align = align; 6382 } 6383 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE) 6384 { 6385 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end); 6386 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle); 6387 } 6388 else if (what == COM_END) 6389 { 6390 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it 6391 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */ 6392 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0 6393 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0) 6394 { 6395 done = TRUE; 6396 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 6397 { 6398 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous 6399 * line, use the indent of that line plus offset. If 6400 * the middle comment string matches in the previous 6401 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */ 6402 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1)); 6403 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0) 6404 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6405 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle, 6406 lead_middle_len) == 0) 6407 { 6408 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6409 break; 6410 } 6411 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the 6412 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */ 6413 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col, 6414 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0) 6415 continue; 6416 } 6417 if (start_off != 0) 6418 amount += start_off; 6419 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT) 6420 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start) 6421 - vim_strsize(lead_middle); 6422 break; 6423 } 6424 6425 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up 6426 * with the middle comment */ 6427 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0 6428 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0) 6429 { 6430 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6431 /* XXX */ 6432 if (off != 0) 6433 amount += off; 6434 else if (align == COM_RIGHT) 6435 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start) 6436 - vim_strsize(lead_middle); 6437 done = TRUE; 6438 break; 6439 } 6440 } 6441 } 6442 6443 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the 6444 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up 6445 * with the first character of the comment text. 6446 */ 6447 if (done) 6448 ; 6449 else if (theline[0] == '*') 6450 amount += 1; 6451 else 6452 { 6453 /* 6454 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take 6455 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO" 6456 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any 6457 * white characters after it line up with the text after it; 6458 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino' 6459 */ 6460 amount = -1; 6461 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum) 6462 { 6463 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */ 6464 continue; 6465 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */ 6466 break; 6467 } 6468 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */ 6469 { 6470 if (!ind_in_comment2) 6471 { 6472 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum); 6473 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */ 6474 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */ 6475 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start); 6476 } 6477 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6478 amount = col; 6479 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL) 6480 amount += ind_in_comment; 6481 } 6482 } 6483 } 6484 6485 /* 6486 * Are we inside parentheses or braces? 6487 */ /* XXX */ 6488 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6489 && ind_java == 0) 6490 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6491 || trypos != NULL) 6492 { 6493 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL) 6494 { 6495 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is 6496 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */ 6497 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum 6498 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum 6499 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col) 6500 trypos = NULL; 6501 else 6502 tryposBrace = NULL; 6503 } 6504 6505 if (trypos != NULL) 6506 { 6507 /* 6508 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of 6509 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren. 6510 */ 6511 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_paren_prev) 6512 { 6513 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */ 6514 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); /* XXX */ 6515 } 6516 else 6517 { 6518 amount = -1; 6519 our_paren_pos = *trypos; 6520 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum) 6521 { 6522 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum)); 6523 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */ 6524 continue; 6525 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) 6526 continue; /* ignore #define, #if, etc. */ 6527 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 6528 6529 /* Skip a comment. XXX */ 6530 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6531 { 6532 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6533 continue; 6534 } 6535 6536 /* XXX */ 6537 if ((trypos = find_match_paren( 6538 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos), 6539 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6540 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum 6541 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col) 6542 { 6543 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */ 6544 6545 if (theline[0] == ')') 6546 { 6547 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum 6548 && cur_amount > amount) 6549 cur_amount = amount; 6550 amount = -1; 6551 } 6552 break; 6553 } 6554 } 6555 } 6556 6557 /* 6558 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX 6559 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed 6560 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses. 6561 */ 6562 if (amount == -1) 6563 { 6564 int ignore_paren_col = 0; 6565 6566 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment); 6567 look = skipwhite(look); 6568 if (*look == '(') 6569 { 6570 linenr_T save_lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 6571 char_u *line; 6572 int look_col; 6573 6574 /* Ignore a '(' in front of the line that has a match before 6575 * our matching '('. */ 6576 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum; 6577 line = ml_get_curline(); 6578 look_col = (int)(look - line); 6579 curwin->w_cursor.col = look_col + 1; 6580 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, ')', 0, ind_maxparen)) 6581 != NULL 6582 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum 6583 && trypos->col < our_paren_pos.col) 6584 ignore_paren_col = trypos->col + 1; 6585 6586 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = save_lnum; 6587 look = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum) + look_col; 6588 } 6589 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0 6590 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *look == '(' 6591 && ignore_paren_col == 0)) 6592 { 6593 /* 6594 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there; 6595 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character. 6596 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is 6597 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the 6598 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next 6599 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long 6600 * lines). 6601 */ 6602 if (theline[0] != ')') 6603 { 6604 cur_amount = MAXCOL; 6605 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum); 6606 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped 6607 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL)) 6608 { 6609 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level 6610 * for each additional level */ 6611 n = 1; 6612 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col) 6613 { 6614 switch (l[col]) 6615 { 6616 case '(': 6617 case '{': ++n; 6618 break; 6619 6620 case ')': 6621 case '}': if (n > 1) 6622 --n; 6623 break; 6624 } 6625 } 6626 6627 our_paren_pos.col = 0; 6628 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped; 6629 } 6630 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok) 6631 our_paren_pos.col++; 6632 else 6633 { 6634 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1; 6635 while (vim_iswhite(l[col])) 6636 col++; 6637 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */ 6638 our_paren_pos.col = col; 6639 else 6640 our_paren_pos.col++; 6641 } 6642 } 6643 6644 /* 6645 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it 6646 * if we did the above "if". 6647 */ 6648 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0) 6649 { 6650 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6651 if (cur_amount > (int)col) 6652 cur_amount = col; 6653 } 6654 } 6655 6656 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren) 6657 { 6658 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */ 6659 } 6660 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore 6661 && *look == '(' && ignore_paren_col == 0)) 6662 { 6663 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL) 6664 amount = cur_amount; 6665 } 6666 else 6667 { 6668 /* Add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one, but 6669 * ignore (void) before the line (ignore_paren_col). */ 6670 col = our_paren_pos.col; 6671 while ((int)our_paren_pos.col > ignore_paren_col) 6672 { 6673 --our_paren_pos.col; 6674 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos)) 6675 { 6676 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2; 6677 col = our_paren_pos.col; 6678 break; 6679 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2; 6680 col = MAXCOL; 6681 break; 6682 } 6683 } 6684 6685 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside 6686 * braces */ 6687 if (col == MAXCOL) 6688 amount += ind_unclosed; 6689 else 6690 { 6691 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum; 6692 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 6693 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6694 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6695 amount += ind_unclosed2; 6696 else 6697 amount += ind_unclosed; 6698 } 6699 /* 6700 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two 6701 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous 6702 * lines: 6703 * func_long_name( if (x 6704 * arg && yy 6705 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here 6706 */ 6707 if (cur_amount < amount) 6708 amount = cur_amount; 6709 } 6710 } 6711 6712 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 6713 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 6714 amount += ind_comment; 6715 } 6716 6717 /* 6718 * Are we at least inside braces, then? 6719 */ 6720 else 6721 { 6722 trypos = tryposBrace; 6723 6724 ourscope = trypos->lnum; 6725 start = ml_get(ourscope); 6726 6727 /* 6728 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general. 6729 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that; 6730 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as 6731 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that. 6732 */ 6733 look = skipwhite(start); 6734 if (*look == '{') 6735 { 6736 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6737 amount = col; 6738 if (*start == '{') 6739 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0; 6740 else 6741 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START; 6742 } 6743 else 6744 { 6745 /* 6746 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation 6747 * line. if so, find the start of the line. 6748 */ 6749 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope; 6750 6751 /* 6752 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 6753 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 6754 */ 6755 lnum = ourscope; 6756 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')') 6757 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6758 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6759 lnum = trypos->lnum; 6760 6761 /* 6762 * It could have been something like 6763 * case 1: if (asdf && 6764 * ldfd) { 6765 * } 6766 */ 6767 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline()))) 6768 amount = get_indent(); 6769 else 6770 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment); 6771 6772 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END; 6773 } 6774 6775 /* 6776 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where 6777 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room 6778 * that an indent is supposed to be. 6779 */ 6780 if (theline[0] == '}') 6781 { 6782 /* 6783 * they may want closing braces to line up with something 6784 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so. 6785 */ 6786 amount += ind_close_extra; 6787 } 6788 else 6789 { 6790 /* 6791 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if" 6792 * to match it with. 6793 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do" 6794 * to match it with. 6795 */ 6796 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL; 6797 if (cin_iselse(theline)) 6798 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF; 6799 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 6800 /* XXX */ 6801 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO; 6802 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL) 6803 { 6804 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum; 6805 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, 6806 ind_maxcomment) == OK) 6807 { 6808 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 6809 goto theend; 6810 } 6811 } 6812 6813 /* 6814 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or 6815 * failed to find a matching "if"). 6816 * Search backwards for something to line up with. 6817 * First set amount for when we don't find anything. 6818 */ 6819 6820 /* 6821 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary 6822 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the 6823 * location for ind_open_extra. 6824 */ 6825 6826 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */ 6827 { 6828 amount = ind_open_left_imag; 6829 } 6830 else 6831 { 6832 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */ 6833 amount += ind_open_imag; 6834 else 6835 { 6836 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */ 6837 amount -= ind_open_extra; 6838 if (amount < 0) 6839 amount = 0; 6840 } 6841 } 6842 6843 lookfor_break = FALSE; 6844 6845 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */ 6846 { 6847 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */ 6848 amount += ind_case; 6849 } 6850 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */ 6851 { 6852 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */ 6853 amount += ind_scopedecl; 6854 } 6855 else 6856 { 6857 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */ 6858 lookfor_break = TRUE; 6859 6860 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL; 6861 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */ 6862 } 6863 scope_amount = amount; 6864 whilelevel = 0; 6865 6866 /* 6867 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up 6868 * with that. 6869 * 6870 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent 6871 * the usual amount relative to the conditional 6872 * that opens the block. 6873 */ 6874 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 6875 for (;;) 6876 { 6877 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 6878 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 6879 6880 /* 6881 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line 6882 * up with it. 6883 */ 6884 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope) 6885 { 6886 /* we reached end of scope: 6887 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization 6888 * go further back: 6889 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then 6890 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable 6891 * declaration: 6892 * int x, 6893 * here; <-- add ind_continuation 6894 */ 6895 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 6896 { 6897 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0 6898 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum 6899 < ourscope - ind_maxparen) 6900 { 6901 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit) 6902 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable 6903 * initialization) */ 6904 if (cont_amount > 0) 6905 amount = cont_amount; 6906 else 6907 amount += ind_continuation; 6908 break; 6909 } 6910 6911 l = ml_get_curline(); 6912 6913 /* 6914 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the 6915 * comment. 6916 */ 6917 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment); 6918 if (trypos != NULL) 6919 { 6920 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6921 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 6922 continue; 6923 } 6924 6925 /* 6926 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines. 6927 */ 6928 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 6929 continue; 6930 6931 if (cin_nocode(l)) 6932 continue; 6933 6934 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE); 6935 6936 /* 6937 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a 6938 * function declaration, we are done 6939 * (it's a variable declaration). 6940 */ 6941 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0 6942 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 6943 { 6944 /* if the line is terminated with another ',' 6945 * it is a continued variable initialization. 6946 * don't add extra indent. 6947 * TODO: does not work, if a function 6948 * declaration is split over multiple lines: 6949 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then. 6950 */ 6951 if (terminated == ',') 6952 break; 6953 6954 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment, 6955 * we are done. 6956 */ 6957 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit()) 6958 break; 6959 6960 /* nothing useful found */ 6961 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{') 6962 continue; 6963 } 6964 6965 if (terminated != ';') 6966 { 6967 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor 6968 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it 6969 * will take us back to the start of the line. 6970 */ /* XXX */ 6971 trypos = NULL; 6972 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')) 6973 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6974 ind_maxcomment); 6975 6976 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}')) 6977 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); 6978 6979 if (trypos != NULL) 6980 { 6981 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6982 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 6983 continue; 6984 } 6985 } 6986 6987 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation 6988 * like in 6989 * int a, 6990 * b; 6991 */ 6992 if (cont_amount > 0) 6993 amount = cont_amount; 6994 else 6995 amount += ind_continuation; 6996 } 6997 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 6998 { 6999 if (cont_amount > 0) 7000 amount = cont_amount; 7001 else 7002 amount += ind_continuation; 7003 } 7004 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM 7005 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 7006 { 7007 amount = scope_amount; 7008 if (theline[0] == '{') 7009 amount += ind_open_extra; 7010 } 7011 break; 7012 } 7013 7014 /* 7015 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 7016 */ /* XXX */ 7017 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7018 { 7019 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 7020 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7021 continue; 7022 } 7023 7024 l = ml_get_curline(); 7025 7026 /* 7027 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that. 7028 * If this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same. 7029 */ 7030 iscase = cin_iscase(l); 7031 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 7032 { 7033 /* we are only looking for cpp base class 7034 * declaration/initialization any longer */ 7035 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 7036 break; 7037 7038 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in 7039 * labels. */ 7040 if (whilelevel > 0) 7041 continue; 7042 7043 /* 7044 * case xx: 7045 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation 7046 *-> here; 7047 */ 7048 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7049 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7050 { 7051 if (cont_amount > 0) 7052 amount = cont_amount; 7053 else 7054 amount += ind_continuation; 7055 break; 7056 } 7057 7058 /* 7059 * case xx: <- line up with this case 7060 * x = 333; 7061 * case yy: 7062 */ 7063 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE) 7064 || (iscase && lookfor_break) 7065 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)) 7066 { 7067 /* 7068 * Check that this case label is not for another 7069 * switch() 7070 */ /* XXX */ 7071 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) == 7072 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope) 7073 { 7074 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7075 break; 7076 } 7077 continue; 7078 } 7079 7080 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */ 7081 7082 /* 7083 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if 7084 * y = y + 1; 7085 * -> s = 99; 7086 * 7087 * case xx: 7088 * if (cond) <- line up with this line 7089 * y = y + 1; 7090 * -> s = 99; 7091 */ 7092 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM) 7093 { 7094 if (n) 7095 amount = n; 7096 7097 if (!lookfor_break) 7098 break; 7099 } 7100 7101 /* 7102 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x 7103 * -> y = y + 1; 7104 * 7105 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if 7106 * -> y = y + 1; 7107 */ 7108 if (n) 7109 { 7110 amount = n; 7111 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 7112 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l)) 7113 { 7114 if (theline[0] == '{') 7115 amount += ind_open_extra; 7116 else 7117 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace; 7118 } 7119 break; 7120 } 7121 7122 /* 7123 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch 7124 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the 7125 * switch label. 7126 * break; <- may line up with this line 7127 * case xx: 7128 * -> y = 1; 7129 */ 7130 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */ 7131 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code); 7132 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY; 7133 continue; 7134 } 7135 7136 /* 7137 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration, 7138 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks. 7139 */ 7140 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL) 7141 { 7142 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos = 7143 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7144 { 7145 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 7146 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7147 } 7148 continue; 7149 } 7150 7151 /* 7152 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them. 7153 */ 7154 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) 7155 { 7156 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 7157 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l)) 7158 continue; 7159 } 7160 7161 /* 7162 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc. 7163 * Ignore comment and empty lines. 7164 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have 7165 * unlocked it) 7166 */ 7167 l = ml_get_curline(); 7168 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum) 7169 || cin_nocode(l)) 7170 continue; 7171 7172 /* 7173 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or 7174 * constructor initialization? 7175 */ /* XXX */ 7176 n = FALSE; 7177 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass > 0) 7178 { 7179 n = cin_is_cpp_baseclass(&col); 7180 l = ml_get_curline(); 7181 } 7182 if (n) 7183 { 7184 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 7185 { 7186 if (cont_amount > 0) 7187 amount = cont_amount; 7188 else 7189 amount += ind_continuation; 7190 } 7191 else if (theline[0] == '{') 7192 { 7193 /* Need to find start of the declaration. */ 7194 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM; 7195 ind_continuation = 0; 7196 continue; 7197 } 7198 else 7199 /* XXX */ 7200 amount = get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen, 7201 ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass); 7202 break; 7203 } 7204 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 7205 { 7206 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class 7207 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. 7208 */ 7209 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE)) 7210 break; 7211 else 7212 continue; 7213 } 7214 7215 /* 7216 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated. 7217 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if 7218 * there is another unterminated statement behind, eg: 7219 * 123, 7220 * sizeof 7221 * here 7222 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure 7223 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration 7224 * (indented). 7225 */ 7226 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE); 7227 7228 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7229 && terminated == ',')) 7230 { 7231 /* 7232 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing, 7233 * go back to the line that starts it so 7234 * we can get the right prevailing indent 7235 * if ( foo && 7236 * bar ) 7237 */ 7238 /* 7239 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 7240 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 7241 */ 7242 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'); 7243 trypos = find_match_paren( 7244 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos), 7245 ind_maxcomment); 7246 7247 /* 7248 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching 7249 * braces. 7250 */ 7251 if (trypos == NULL && terminated == ',' 7252 && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}')) 7253 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); 7254 7255 if (trypos != NULL) 7256 { 7257 /* 7258 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is 7259 * handled above. 7260 * case xx: if ( asdf && 7261 * asdf) 7262 */ 7263 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 7264 l = ml_get_curline(); 7265 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 7266 { 7267 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7268 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7269 continue; 7270 } 7271 } 7272 7273 /* 7274 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the 7275 * indent from 7276 * char *usethis = "bla\ 7277 * bla", 7278 * here; 7279 */ 7280 if (terminated == ',') 7281 { 7282 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 7283 { 7284 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 7285 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\') 7286 break; 7287 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7288 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7289 } 7290 } 7291 7292 /* 7293 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line, 7294 * ignoring any jump label. XXX 7295 */ 7296 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 7297 &l, ind_maxcomment); 7298 7299 /* 7300 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it 7301 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line. 7302 * while (not) 7303 * -> { 7304 * } 7305 */ 7306 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM 7307 && theline[0] == '{') 7308 { 7309 amount = cur_amount; 7310 /* 7311 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line 7312 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match 7313 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably: 7314 * { 1, 2 }, 7315 * -> { 3, 4 } 7316 */ 7317 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{') 7318 amount += ind_open_extra; 7319 7320 if (ind_cpp_baseclass) 7321 { 7322 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base 7323 * class declaration or initialization */ 7324 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS; 7325 continue; 7326 } 7327 break; 7328 } 7329 7330 /* 7331 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc. 7332 * Also allow " } else". 7333 */ 7334 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l))) 7335 { 7336 /* 7337 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up 7338 * with the last one. 7339 * if (cond) 7340 * 100 + 7341 * -> here; 7342 */ 7343 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7344 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7345 { 7346 if (cont_amount > 0) 7347 amount = cont_amount; 7348 else 7349 amount += ind_continuation; 7350 break; 7351 } 7352 7353 /* 7354 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we 7355 * are finished. 7356 * while (not) 7357 * -> here; 7358 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line 7359 * before this is terminated. 7360 * yyy; 7361 * if (stat) 7362 * while (not) 7363 * xxx; 7364 * -> here; 7365 */ 7366 amount = cur_amount; 7367 if (theline[0] == '{') 7368 amount += ind_open_extra; 7369 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM) 7370 { 7371 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace; 7372 break; 7373 } 7374 7375 /* 7376 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a 7377 * do, line up with the while() 7378 * do 7379 * x = 1; 7380 * -> here 7381 */ 7382 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline()); 7383 if (cin_isdo(l)) 7384 { 7385 if (whilelevel == 0) 7386 break; 7387 --whilelevel; 7388 } 7389 7390 /* 7391 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the 7392 * one between the "if" and the "else". 7393 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX 7394 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {". 7395 */ 7396 if (cin_iselse(l) 7397 && whilelevel == 0 7398 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) 7399 == NULL 7400 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum, 7401 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL)) 7402 break; 7403 } 7404 7405 /* 7406 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an 7407 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or 7408 * add something for a continuation line, depending on 7409 * the line before this one. 7410 */ 7411 else 7412 { 7413 /* 7414 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with 7415 * the last one. 7416 * c = 99 + 7417 * 100 + 7418 * -> here; 7419 */ 7420 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 7421 { 7422 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */ 7423 if (terminated == ',') 7424 amount += ind_continuation; 7425 break; 7426 } 7427 7428 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7429 { 7430 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the 7431 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class 7432 * declaration/initialization, if it is an 7433 * opening brace or we are looking just for 7434 * enumerations/initializations. */ 7435 if (terminated == ',') 7436 { 7437 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0) 7438 break; 7439 7440 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS; 7441 continue; 7442 } 7443 7444 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but 7445 * reduce indent. */ 7446 if (amount > cur_amount) 7447 amount = cur_amount; 7448 } 7449 else 7450 { 7451 /* 7452 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may 7453 * line up with this line, remember its indent 7454 * 100 + 7455 * -> here; 7456 */ 7457 amount = cur_amount; 7458 7459 /* 7460 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we 7461 * are in an initialization or enum 7462 * struct xxx = 7463 * { 7464 * sizeof a, 7465 * 124 }; 7466 * or a normal possible continuation line. 7467 * but only, of no other statement has been found 7468 * yet. 7469 */ 7470 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',') 7471 { 7472 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT; 7473 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount(); 7474 } 7475 else 7476 { 7477 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL 7478 && *l != NUL 7479 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\') 7480 /* XXX */ 7481 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount( 7482 curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 7483 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM) 7484 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM; 7485 } 7486 } 7487 } 7488 } 7489 7490 /* 7491 * Check if we are after a while (cond); 7492 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do". 7493 */ 7494 /* XXX */ 7495 else if (cin_iswhileofdo_end(terminated, ind_maxparen, 7496 ind_maxcomment)) 7497 { 7498 /* 7499 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up 7500 * with the last one. 7501 * while (cond); 7502 * 100 + <- line up with this one 7503 * -> here; 7504 */ 7505 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7506 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7507 { 7508 if (cont_amount > 0) 7509 amount = cont_amount; 7510 else 7511 amount += ind_continuation; 7512 break; 7513 } 7514 7515 if (whilelevel == 0) 7516 { 7517 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM; 7518 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7519 if (theline[0] == '{') 7520 amount += ind_open_extra; 7521 } 7522 ++whilelevel; 7523 } 7524 7525 /* 7526 * We are after a "normal" statement. 7527 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the 7528 * indent of that other statement. 7529 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used, 7530 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement. 7531 */ 7532 else 7533 { 7534 /* 7535 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It 7536 * may be lined up with the case label. 7537 */ 7538 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 7539 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline()))) 7540 { 7541 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY; 7542 continue; 7543 } 7544 7545 /* 7546 * Handle "do {" line. 7547 */ 7548 if (whilelevel > 0) 7549 { 7550 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7551 if (cin_isdo(l)) 7552 { 7553 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7554 --whilelevel; 7555 continue; 7556 } 7557 } 7558 7559 /* 7560 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add 7561 * the amount for a continuation line. 7562 * x = 1; 7563 * y = foo + 7564 * -> here; 7565 * or 7566 * int x = 1; 7567 * int foo, 7568 * -> here; 7569 */ 7570 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7571 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7572 { 7573 if (cont_amount > 0) 7574 amount = cont_amount; 7575 else 7576 amount += ind_continuation; 7577 break; 7578 } 7579 7580 /* 7581 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if" 7582 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us. 7583 * x = 1; x = 1; 7584 * if (asdf) y = 2; 7585 * while (asdf) ->here; 7586 * here; 7587 * ->foo; 7588 */ 7589 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM) 7590 { 7591 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0) 7592 break; 7593 } 7594 7595 /* 7596 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated. 7597 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for 7598 * a terminated line. 7599 */ 7600 else 7601 { 7602 /* 7603 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so 7604 * that matching it will take us back to the start of 7605 * the line. Helps for: 7606 * func(asdr, 7607 * asdfasdf); 7608 * here; 7609 */ 7610 term_again: 7611 l = ml_get_curline(); 7612 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7613 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7614 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7615 { 7616 /* 7617 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is 7618 * handled above. 7619 * case xx: if ( asdf && 7620 * asdf) 7621 */ 7622 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 7623 l = ml_get_curline(); 7624 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 7625 { 7626 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7627 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7628 continue; 7629 } 7630 } 7631 7632 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align 7633 * with a statement after it. 7634 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position 7635 * stat; 7636 * } 7637 * case 2: 7638 * stat; 7639 * } 7640 */ 7641 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l)); 7642 7643 /* 7644 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line, 7645 * ignoring any jump label. 7646 */ 7647 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 7648 &l, ind_maxcomment); 7649 7650 if (theline[0] == '{') 7651 amount += ind_open_extra; 7652 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */ 7653 l = skipwhite(l); 7654 if (*l == '{') 7655 amount -= ind_open_extra; 7656 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM; 7657 7658 /* 7659 * When a terminated line starts with "else" skip to 7660 * the matching "if": 7661 * else 3; 7662 * indent this; 7663 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX 7664 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {". 7665 */ 7666 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM 7667 && *l != '}' 7668 && cin_iselse(l) 7669 && whilelevel == 0) 7670 { 7671 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) 7672 == NULL 7673 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum, 7674 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL) 7675 break; 7676 continue; 7677 } 7678 7679 /* 7680 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of 7681 * that block. 7682 */ 7683 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7684 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}' 7685 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) 7686 != NULL) /* XXX */ 7687 { 7688 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 7689 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */ 7690 /* but skip block for "} else {" */ 7691 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7692 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l)) 7693 goto term_again; 7694 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7695 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7696 } 7697 } 7698 } 7699 } 7700 } 7701 } 7702 7703 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 7704 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 7705 amount += ind_comment; 7706 } 7707 7708 /* 7709 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all! 7710 * 7711 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should 7712 * basically just match where the previous line is, except 7713 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration, 7714 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented. 7715 */ 7716 else 7717 { 7718 /* 7719 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any 7720 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start 7721 * of a function 7722 */ 7723 7724 if (theline[0] == '{') 7725 { 7726 amount = ind_first_open; 7727 } 7728 7729 /* 7730 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current 7731 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec. 7732 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment or if the 7733 * current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';', or if the current line 7734 * contains { or }: "void f() {\n if (1)" 7735 */ 7736 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count 7737 && !cin_nocode(theline) 7738 && vim_strchr(theline, '{') == NULL 7739 && vim_strchr(theline, '}') == NULL 7740 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL) 7741 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7742 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1) 7743 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE)) 7744 { 7745 amount = ind_func_type; 7746 } 7747 else 7748 { 7749 amount = 0; 7750 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 7751 7752 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */ 7753 7754 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 7755 { 7756 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 7757 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7758 7759 l = ml_get_curline(); 7760 7761 /* 7762 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 7763 */ /* XXX */ 7764 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7765 { 7766 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 7767 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7768 continue; 7769 } 7770 7771 /* 7772 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or 7773 * constructor initialization? 7774 */ /* XXX */ 7775 n = FALSE; 7776 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{') 7777 { 7778 n = cin_is_cpp_baseclass(&col); 7779 l = ml_get_curline(); 7780 } 7781 if (n) 7782 { 7783 /* XXX */ 7784 amount = get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen, 7785 ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass); 7786 break; 7787 } 7788 7789 /* 7790 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines. 7791 */ 7792 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7793 continue; 7794 7795 if (cin_nocode(l)) 7796 continue; 7797 7798 /* 7799 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of 7800 * indentation: 7801 * int foo, 7802 * bar; 7803 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg. 7804 * enum foobar 7805 * { 7806 * ... 7807 * } foo, 7808 * bar; 7809 */ 7810 n = 0; 7811 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7812 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\')) 7813 { 7814 /* take us back to opening paren */ 7815 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7816 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7817 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7818 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 7819 7820 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go 7821 * back to the first line with a backslash: 7822 * char *foo = "bla\ 7823 * bla", 7824 * here; 7825 */ 7826 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 7827 { 7828 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 7829 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\') 7830 break; 7831 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7832 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7833 } 7834 7835 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7836 7837 if (amount == 0) 7838 amount = cin_first_id_amount(); 7839 if (amount == 0) 7840 amount = ind_continuation; 7841 break; 7842 } 7843 7844 /* 7845 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're 7846 * not in a comment, put it the left margin. 7847 */ 7848 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */ 7849 break; 7850 l = ml_get_curline(); 7851 7852 /* 7853 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put 7854 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs". 7855 */ 7856 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}') 7857 break; 7858 7859 /* (matching {) 7860 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by 7861 * comments) align at column 0. For example: 7862 * char *string_array[] = { "foo", 7863 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * / 7864 */ 7865 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL)) 7866 break; 7867 7868 /* 7869 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current 7870 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as 7871 * parameters. 7872 */ 7873 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7874 { 7875 amount = ind_param; 7876 break; 7877 } 7878 7879 /* 7880 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the 7881 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero: 7882 * int foo, 7883 * bar; 7884 * indent_to_0 here; 7885 */ 7886 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)";", NULL)) 7887 { 7888 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 7889 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7890 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')) 7891 break; 7892 l = ml_get_curline(); 7893 } 7894 7895 /* 7896 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just 7897 * use the indent of this line. 7898 * 7899 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 7900 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 7901 */ 7902 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'); 7903 7904 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7905 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7906 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 7907 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7908 break; 7909 } 7910 7911 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 7912 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 7913 amount += ind_comment; 7914 7915 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash: 7916 * "asdfasdf\ 7917 * here"; 7918 * char *foo = "asdf\ 7919 * here"; 7920 */ 7921 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1) 7922 { 7923 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1); 7924 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\') 7925 { 7926 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1); 7927 if (cur_amount > 0) 7928 amount = cur_amount; 7929 else if (cur_amount == 0) 7930 amount += ind_continuation; 7931 } 7932 } 7933 } 7934 } 7935 7936 theend: 7937 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */ 7938 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 7939 7940 vim_free(linecopy); 7941 7942 if (amount < 0) 7943 return 0; 7944 return amount; 7945 } 7946 7947 static int 7948 find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) 7949 int lookfor; 7950 linenr_T ourscope; 7951 int ind_maxparen; 7952 int ind_maxcomment; 7953 { 7954 char_u *look; 7955 pos_T *theirscope; 7956 char_u *mightbeif; 7957 int elselevel; 7958 int whilelevel; 7959 7960 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF) 7961 { 7962 elselevel = 1; 7963 whilelevel = 0; 7964 } 7965 else 7966 { 7967 elselevel = 0; 7968 whilelevel = 1; 7969 } 7970 7971 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7972 7973 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1) 7974 { 7975 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 7976 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7977 7978 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7979 if (cin_iselse(look) 7980 || cin_isif(look) 7981 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */ 7982 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 7983 { 7984 /* 7985 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely, 7986 * we must be out of scope... 7987 */ 7988 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */ 7989 if (theirscope == NULL) 7990 break; 7991 7992 /* 7993 * and if the brace enclosing this is further 7994 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're 7995 * out of luck too. 7996 */ 7997 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope) 7998 break; 7999 8000 /* 8001 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace, 8002 * then we can ignore it because it's in a 8003 * different scope... 8004 */ 8005 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope) 8006 continue; 8007 8008 /* 8009 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if") 8010 * then we need to go back to another if, so 8011 * increment elselevel 8012 */ 8013 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 8014 if (cin_iselse(look)) 8015 { 8016 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4); 8017 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif)) 8018 ++elselevel; 8019 continue; 8020 } 8021 8022 /* 8023 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to 8024 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX 8025 */ 8026 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 8027 { 8028 ++whilelevel; 8029 continue; 8030 } 8031 8032 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */ 8033 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 8034 if (cin_isif(look)) 8035 { 8036 elselevel--; 8037 /* 8038 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that 8039 * get in the way. 8040 */ 8041 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF) 8042 whilelevel = 0; 8043 } 8044 8045 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */ 8046 if (cin_isdo(look)) 8047 whilelevel--; 8048 8049 /* 8050 * if we've used up all the elses, then 8051 * this must be the if that we want! 8052 * match the indent level of that if. 8053 */ 8054 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0) 8055 { 8056 return OK; 8057 } 8058 } 8059 } 8060 return FAIL; 8061 } 8062 8063 # if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) 8064 /* 8065 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'. 8066 */ 8067 int 8068 get_expr_indent() 8069 { 8070 int indent; 8071 pos_T pos; 8072 int save_State; 8073 int use_sandbox = was_set_insecurely((char_u *)"indentexpr", 8074 OPT_LOCAL); 8075 8076 pos = curwin->w_cursor; 8077 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 8078 if (use_sandbox) 8079 ++sandbox; 8080 ++textlock; 8081 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde); 8082 if (use_sandbox) 8083 --sandbox; 8084 --textlock; 8085 8086 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to. 8087 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o" 8088 * command. */ 8089 save_State = State; 8090 State = INSERT; 8091 curwin->w_cursor = pos; 8092 check_cursor(); 8093 State = save_State; 8094 8095 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */ 8096 if (indent < 0) 8097 indent = get_indent(); 8098 8099 return indent; 8100 } 8101 # endif 8102 8103 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */ 8104 8105 #if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO) 8106 8107 static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p)); 8108 8109 static int 8110 lisp_match(p) 8111 char_u *p; 8112 { 8113 char_u buf[LSIZE]; 8114 int len; 8115 char_u *word = p_lispwords; 8116 8117 while (*word != NUL) 8118 { 8119 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ","); 8120 len = (int)STRLEN(buf); 8121 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ') 8122 return TRUE; 8123 } 8124 return FALSE; 8125 } 8126 8127 /* 8128 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used. 8129 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting 8130 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still 8131 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, [email protected] 8132 * 8133 * TODO: 8134 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch 8135 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented: 8136 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals 8137 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon 8138 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal 8139 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases. 8140 * Update from Sergey Khorev: 8141 * I tried to fix the first two issues. 8142 */ 8143 int 8144 get_lisp_indent() 8145 { 8146 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren; 8147 int amount; 8148 char_u *that; 8149 colnr_T col; 8150 colnr_T firsttry; 8151 int parencount, quotecount; 8152 int vi_lisp; 8153 8154 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */ 8155 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL); 8156 8157 realpos = curwin->w_cursor; 8158 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 8159 8160 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL) 8161 pos = findmatch(NULL, '['); 8162 else 8163 { 8164 paren = *pos; 8165 pos = findmatch(NULL, '['); 8166 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren)) 8167 pos = &paren; 8168 } 8169 if (pos != NULL) 8170 { 8171 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white 8172 * line that is at the same () level. */ 8173 amount = -1; 8174 parencount = 0; 8175 8176 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum) 8177 { 8178 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 8179 continue; 8180 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that) 8181 { 8182 if (*that == ';') 8183 { 8184 while (*(that + 1) != NUL) 8185 ++that; 8186 continue; 8187 } 8188 if (*that == '\\') 8189 { 8190 if (*(that + 1) != NUL) 8191 ++that; 8192 continue; 8193 } 8194 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL) 8195 { 8196 while (*++that && *that != '"') 8197 { 8198 /* skipping escaped characters in the string */ 8199 if (*that == '\\') 8200 { 8201 if (*++that == NUL) 8202 break; 8203 if (that[1] == NUL) 8204 { 8205 ++that; 8206 break; 8207 } 8208 } 8209 } 8210 } 8211 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[') 8212 ++parencount; 8213 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']') 8214 --parencount; 8215 } 8216 if (parencount == 0) 8217 { 8218 amount = get_indent(); 8219 break; 8220 } 8221 } 8222 8223 if (amount == -1) 8224 { 8225 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 8226 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col; 8227 col = pos->col; 8228 8229 that = ml_get_curline(); 8230 8231 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0) 8232 amount = 2; 8233 else 8234 { 8235 amount = 0; 8236 while (*that && col) 8237 { 8238 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount); 8239 col--; 8240 } 8241 8242 /* 8243 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the 8244 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms): 8245 * 8246 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1)) 8247 * (...)) of (...)) 8248 */ 8249 8250 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[') 8251 && lisp_match(that + 1)) 8252 amount += 2; 8253 else 8254 { 8255 that++; 8256 amount++; 8257 firsttry = amount; 8258 8259 while (vim_iswhite(*that)) 8260 { 8261 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount); 8262 ++that; 8263 } 8264 8265 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */ 8266 { 8267 /* test *that != '(' to accommodate first let/do 8268 * argument if it is more than one line */ 8269 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[') 8270 firsttry++; 8271 8272 parencount = 0; 8273 quotecount = 0; 8274 8275 if (vi_lisp 8276 || (*that != '"' 8277 && *that != '\'' 8278 && *that != '#' 8279 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9'))) 8280 { 8281 while (*that 8282 && (!vim_iswhite(*that) 8283 || quotecount 8284 || parencount) 8285 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[') 8286 && !quotecount 8287 && !parencount 8288 && vi_lisp))) 8289 { 8290 if (*that == '"') 8291 quotecount = !quotecount; 8292 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[') 8293 && !quotecount) 8294 ++parencount; 8295 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']') 8296 && !quotecount) 8297 --parencount; 8298 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL) 8299 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, 8300 (colnr_T)amount); 8301 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, 8302 (colnr_T)amount); 8303 } 8304 } 8305 while (vim_iswhite(*that)) 8306 { 8307 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount); 8308 that++; 8309 } 8310 if (!*that || *that == ';') 8311 amount = firsttry; 8312 } 8313 } 8314 } 8315 } 8316 } 8317 else 8318 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */ 8319 8320 curwin->w_cursor = realpos; 8321 8322 return amount; 8323 } 8324 #endif /* FEAT_LISP */ 8325 8326 void 8327 prepare_to_exit() 8328 { 8329 #if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN) 8330 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which 8331 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance 8332 * problems. */ 8333 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN); 8334 #endif 8335 8336 #ifdef FEAT_GUI 8337 if (gui.in_use) 8338 { 8339 gui.dying = TRUE; 8340 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */ 8341 } 8342 else 8343 #endif 8344 { 8345 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0); 8346 8347 /* 8348 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal" 8349 * screen (if there are two screens). 8350 */ 8351 settmode(TMODE_COOK); 8352 #ifdef WIN3264 8353 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE) 8354 #endif 8355 stoptermcap(); 8356 out_flush(); 8357 } 8358 } 8359 8360 /* 8361 * Preserve files and exit. 8362 * When called IObuff must contain a message. 8363 */ 8364 void 8365 preserve_exit() 8366 { 8367 buf_T *buf; 8368 8369 prepare_to_exit(); 8370 8371 /* Setting this will prevent free() calls. That avoids calling free() 8372 * recursively when free() was invoked with a bad pointer. */ 8373 really_exiting = TRUE; 8374 8375 out_str(IObuff); 8376 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */ 8377 out_flush(); 8378 8379 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */ 8380 8381 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next) 8382 { 8383 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL) 8384 { 8385 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n")); 8386 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */ 8387 out_flush(); 8388 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ 8389 break; 8390 } 8391 } 8392 8393 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */ 8394 8395 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n")); 8396 8397 getout(1); 8398 } 8399 8400 /* 8401 * return TRUE if "fname" exists. 8402 */ 8403 int 8404 vim_fexists(fname) 8405 char_u *fname; 8406 { 8407 struct stat st; 8408 8409 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st)) 8410 return FALSE; 8411 return TRUE; 8412 } 8413 8414 /* 8415 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while. 8416 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for 8417 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much 8418 * time, because it can be a system call. 8419 */ 8420 8421 #ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP 8422 # ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */ 8423 # define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200 8424 # else 8425 # define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32 8426 # endif 8427 #endif 8428 8429 static int breakcheck_count = 0; 8430 8431 void 8432 line_breakcheck() 8433 { 8434 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP) 8435 { 8436 breakcheck_count = 0; 8437 ui_breakcheck(); 8438 } 8439 } 8440 8441 /* 8442 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often. 8443 */ 8444 void 8445 fast_breakcheck() 8446 { 8447 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10) 8448 { 8449 breakcheck_count = 0; 8450 ui_breakcheck(); 8451 } 8452 } 8453 8454 /* 8455 * Invoke expand_wildcards() for one pattern. 8456 * Expand items like "%:h" before the expansion. 8457 * Returns OK or FAIL. 8458 */ 8459 int 8460 expand_wildcards_eval(pat, num_file, file, flags) 8461 char_u **pat; /* pointer to input pattern */ 8462 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */ 8463 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */ 8464 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */ 8465 { 8466 int ret = FAIL; 8467 char_u *eval_pat = NULL; 8468 char_u *exp_pat = *pat; 8469 char_u *ignored_msg; 8470 int usedlen; 8471 8472 if (*exp_pat == '%' || *exp_pat == '#' || *exp_pat == '<') 8473 { 8474 ++emsg_off; 8475 eval_pat = eval_vars(exp_pat, exp_pat, &usedlen, 8476 NULL, &ignored_msg, NULL); 8477 --emsg_off; 8478 if (eval_pat != NULL) 8479 exp_pat = concat_str(eval_pat, exp_pat + usedlen); 8480 } 8481 8482 if (exp_pat != NULL) 8483 ret = expand_wildcards(1, &exp_pat, num_file, file, flags); 8484 8485 if (eval_pat != NULL) 8486 { 8487 vim_free(exp_pat); 8488 vim_free(eval_pat); 8489 } 8490 8491 return ret; 8492 } 8493 8494 /* 8495 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching 8496 * 'wildignore'. 8497 * Returns OK or FAIL. 8498 */ 8499 int 8500 expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags) 8501 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */ 8502 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */ 8503 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */ 8504 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */ 8505 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */ 8506 { 8507 int retval; 8508 int i, j; 8509 char_u *p; 8510 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */ 8511 8512 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 8513 8514 /* When keeping all matches, return here */ 8515 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL) 8516 return retval; 8517 8518 #ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN 8519 /* 8520 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'. 8521 */ 8522 if (*p_wig) 8523 { 8524 char_u *ffname; 8525 8526 /* check all files in (*file)[] */ 8527 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i) 8528 { 8529 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE); 8530 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */ 8531 break; 8532 # ifdef VMS 8533 vms_remove_version(ffname); 8534 # endif 8535 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname)) 8536 { 8537 /* remove this matching file from the list */ 8538 vim_free((*file)[i]); 8539 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j) 8540 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1]; 8541 --*num_file; 8542 --i; 8543 } 8544 vim_free(ffname); 8545 } 8546 } 8547 #endif 8548 8549 /* 8550 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end. 8551 */ 8552 if (*num_file > 1) 8553 { 8554 non_suf_match = 0; 8555 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i) 8556 { 8557 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i])) 8558 { 8559 /* 8560 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front 8561 * of the list. 8562 */ 8563 p = (*file)[i]; 8564 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j) 8565 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1]; 8566 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p; 8567 } 8568 } 8569 } 8570 8571 return retval; 8572 } 8573 8574 /* 8575 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'. 8576 */ 8577 int 8578 match_suffix(fname) 8579 char_u *fname; 8580 { 8581 int fnamelen, setsuflen; 8582 char_u *setsuf; 8583 #define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */ 8584 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN]; 8585 8586 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname); 8587 setsuflen = 0; 8588 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; ) 8589 { 8590 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,"); 8591 if (setsuflen == 0) 8592 { 8593 char_u *tail = gettail(fname); 8594 8595 /* empty entry: match name without a '.' */ 8596 if (vim_strchr(tail, '.') == NULL) 8597 { 8598 setsuflen = 1; 8599 break; 8600 } 8601 } 8602 else 8603 { 8604 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen 8605 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen, 8606 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0) 8607 break; 8608 setsuflen = 0; 8609 } 8610 } 8611 return (setsuflen != 0); 8612 } 8613 8614 #if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO) 8615 8616 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8617 static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p)); 8618 static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags)); 8619 # endif 8620 8621 # if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264) 8622 /* 8623 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because 8624 * it's shared between these systems. 8625 */ 8626 # if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO) 8627 # define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */ 8628 # else 8629 # ifdef __BORLANDC__ 8630 # define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF 8631 # endif 8632 # endif 8633 8634 /* 8635 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath() 8636 */ 8637 static int _cdecl 8638 pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b) 8639 { 8640 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1)); 8641 } 8642 8643 # ifndef WIN3264 8644 static void 8645 namelowcpy( 8646 char_u *d, 8647 char_u *s) 8648 { 8649 # ifdef DJGPP 8650 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */ 8651 while (*s) 8652 *d++ = *s++; 8653 else 8654 # endif 8655 while (*s) 8656 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++); 8657 *d = NUL; 8658 } 8659 # endif 8660 8661 /* 8662 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or 8663 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc. 8664 * Return the number of matches found. 8665 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting 8666 * at "path[wildoff]". 8667 * Return the number of matches found. 8668 * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync! 8669 */ 8670 static int 8671 dos_expandpath( 8672 garray_T *gap, 8673 char_u *path, 8674 int wildoff, 8675 int flags, /* EW_* flags */ 8676 int didstar) /* expanded "**" once already */ 8677 { 8678 char_u *buf; 8679 char_u *path_end; 8680 char_u *p, *s, *e; 8681 int start_len = gap->ga_len; 8682 char_u *pat; 8683 regmatch_T regmatch; 8684 int starts_with_dot; 8685 int matches; 8686 int len; 8687 int starstar = FALSE; 8688 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */ 8689 #ifdef WIN3264 8690 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb; 8691 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0; 8692 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8693 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb; 8694 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */ 8695 # endif 8696 #else 8697 struct ffblk fb; 8698 #endif 8699 char_u *matchname; 8700 int ok; 8701 8702 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */ 8703 if (stardepth > 0) 8704 { 8705 ui_breakcheck(); 8706 if (got_int) 8707 return 0; 8708 } 8709 8710 /* make room for file name */ 8711 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5); 8712 if (buf == NULL) 8713 return 0; 8714 8715 /* 8716 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1. 8717 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters. 8718 */ 8719 p = buf; 8720 s = buf; 8721 e = NULL; 8722 path_end = path; 8723 while (*path_end != NUL) 8724 { 8725 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will 8726 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */ 8727 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end)) 8728 *p++ = *path_end++; 8729 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/') 8730 { 8731 if (e != NULL) 8732 break; 8733 s = p + 1; 8734 } 8735 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff 8736 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL) 8737 e = p; 8738 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8739 if (has_mbyte) 8740 { 8741 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end); 8742 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len); 8743 p += len; 8744 path_end += len; 8745 } 8746 else 8747 #endif 8748 *p++ = *path_end++; 8749 } 8750 e = p; 8751 *e = NUL; 8752 8753 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */ 8754 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard 8755 * component. */ 8756 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p) 8757 if (rem_backslash(p)) 8758 { 8759 STRMOVE(p, p + 1); 8760 --e; 8761 --s; 8762 } 8763 8764 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */ 8765 for (p = s; p < e; ++p) 8766 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*') 8767 starstar = TRUE; 8768 8769 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.'); 8770 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE); 8771 if (pat == NULL) 8772 { 8773 vim_free(buf); 8774 return 0; 8775 } 8776 8777 /* compile the regexp into a program */ 8778 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */ 8779 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC); 8780 vim_free(pat); 8781 8782 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL) 8783 { 8784 vim_free(buf); 8785 return 0; 8786 } 8787 8788 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */ 8789 matchname = vim_strsave(s); 8790 8791 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more 8792 * is following then find matches without any directory. */ 8793 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2 8794 && *path_end == '/') 8795 { 8796 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1); 8797 ++stardepth; 8798 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE); 8799 --stardepth; 8800 } 8801 8802 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */ 8803 STRCPY(s, "*.*"); 8804 #ifdef WIN3264 8805 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8806 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage) 8807 { 8808 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the 8809 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back 8810 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */ 8811 wn = enc_to_utf16(buf, NULL); 8812 if (wn != NULL) 8813 { 8814 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb); 8815 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE 8816 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED) 8817 { 8818 vim_free(wn); 8819 wn = NULL; 8820 } 8821 } 8822 } 8823 8824 if (wn == NULL) 8825 # endif 8826 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb); 8827 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE); 8828 #else 8829 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */ 8830 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb, 8831 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0); 8832 #endif 8833 8834 while (ok) 8835 { 8836 #ifdef WIN3264 8837 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8838 if (wn != NULL) 8839 p = utf16_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */ 8840 else 8841 # endif 8842 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName; 8843 #else 8844 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name; 8845 #endif 8846 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept 8847 * all entries found with "matchname". */ 8848 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot) 8849 && (matchname == NULL 8850 || vim_regexec(®match, p, (colnr_T)0))) 8851 { 8852 #ifdef WIN3264 8853 STRCPY(s, p); 8854 #else 8855 namelowcpy(s, p); 8856 #endif 8857 len = (int)STRLEN(buf); 8858 8859 if (starstar && stardepth < 100) 8860 { 8861 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to 8862 * find matches. */ 8863 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**"); 8864 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end); 8865 ++stardepth; 8866 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE); 8867 --stardepth; 8868 } 8869 8870 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end); 8871 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) 8872 { 8873 /* need to expand another component of the path */ 8874 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8875 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE); 8876 } 8877 else 8878 { 8879 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */ 8880 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8881 if (*path_end != 0) 8882 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1); 8883 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */ 8884 addfile(gap, buf, flags); 8885 } 8886 } 8887 8888 #ifdef WIN3264 8889 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8890 if (wn != NULL) 8891 { 8892 vim_free(p); 8893 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb); 8894 } 8895 else 8896 # endif 8897 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb); 8898 #else 8899 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0); 8900 #endif 8901 8902 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name 8903 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */ 8904 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len) 8905 { 8906 STRCPY(s, matchname); 8907 #ifdef WIN3264 8908 FindClose(hFind); 8909 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8910 if (wn != NULL) 8911 { 8912 vim_free(wn); 8913 wn = enc_to_utf16(buf, NULL); 8914 if (wn != NULL) 8915 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb); 8916 } 8917 if (wn == NULL) 8918 # endif 8919 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb); 8920 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE); 8921 #else 8922 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb, 8923 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0); 8924 #endif 8925 vim_free(matchname); 8926 matchname = NULL; 8927 } 8928 } 8929 8930 #ifdef WIN3264 8931 FindClose(hFind); 8932 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8933 vim_free(wn); 8934 # endif 8935 #endif 8936 vim_free(buf); 8937 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 8938 vim_free(matchname); 8939 8940 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len; 8941 if (matches > 0) 8942 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches, 8943 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp); 8944 return matches; 8945 } 8946 8947 int 8948 mch_expandpath( 8949 garray_T *gap, 8950 char_u *path, 8951 int flags) /* EW_* flags */ 8952 { 8953 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE); 8954 } 8955 # endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */ 8956 8957 #if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \ 8958 || defined(PROTO) 8959 /* 8960 * Unix style wildcard expansion code. 8961 * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac. 8962 */ 8963 static int pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *)); 8964 8965 static int 8966 pstrcmp(a, b) 8967 const void *a, *b; 8968 { 8969 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1)); 8970 } 8971 8972 /* 8973 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or 8974 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc. 8975 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting 8976 * at "path + wildoff". 8977 * Return the number of matches found. 8978 * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync! 8979 */ 8980 int 8981 unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar) 8982 garray_T *gap; 8983 char_u *path; 8984 int wildoff; 8985 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 8986 int didstar; /* expanded "**" once already */ 8987 { 8988 char_u *buf; 8989 char_u *path_end; 8990 char_u *p, *s, *e; 8991 int start_len = gap->ga_len; 8992 char_u *pat; 8993 regmatch_T regmatch; 8994 int starts_with_dot; 8995 int matches; 8996 int len; 8997 int starstar = FALSE; 8998 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */ 8999 9000 DIR *dirp; 9001 struct dirent *dp; 9002 9003 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */ 9004 if (stardepth > 0) 9005 { 9006 ui_breakcheck(); 9007 if (got_int) 9008 return 0; 9009 } 9010 9011 /* make room for file name */ 9012 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5); 9013 if (buf == NULL) 9014 return 0; 9015 9016 /* 9017 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard. 9018 * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters. 9019 */ 9020 p = buf; 9021 s = buf; 9022 e = NULL; 9023 path_end = path; 9024 while (*path_end != NUL) 9025 { 9026 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will 9027 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */ 9028 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end)) 9029 *p++ = *path_end++; 9030 else if (*path_end == '/') 9031 { 9032 if (e != NULL) 9033 break; 9034 s = p + 1; 9035 } 9036 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff 9037 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL) 9038 e = p; 9039 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 9040 if (has_mbyte) 9041 { 9042 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end); 9043 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len); 9044 p += len; 9045 path_end += len; 9046 } 9047 else 9048 #endif 9049 *p++ = *path_end++; 9050 } 9051 e = p; 9052 *e = NUL; 9053 9054 /* now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e" */ 9055 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard 9056 * component. */ 9057 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p) 9058 if (rem_backslash(p)) 9059 { 9060 STRMOVE(p, p + 1); 9061 --e; 9062 --s; 9063 } 9064 9065 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */ 9066 for (p = s; p < e; ++p) 9067 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*') 9068 starstar = TRUE; 9069 9070 /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */ 9071 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.'); 9072 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE); 9073 if (pat == NULL) 9074 { 9075 vim_free(buf); 9076 return 0; 9077 } 9078 9079 /* compile the regexp into a program */ 9080 #ifdef CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME 9081 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Behave like Terminal.app */ 9082 #else 9083 regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE; /* Don't ever ignore case */ 9084 #endif 9085 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC); 9086 vim_free(pat); 9087 9088 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL) 9089 { 9090 vim_free(buf); 9091 return 0; 9092 } 9093 9094 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more 9095 * is following then find matches without any directory. */ 9096 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2 9097 && *path_end == '/') 9098 { 9099 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1); 9100 ++stardepth; 9101 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE); 9102 --stardepth; 9103 } 9104 9105 /* open the directory for scanning */ 9106 *s = NUL; 9107 dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf); 9108 9109 /* Find all matching entries */ 9110 if (dirp != NULL) 9111 { 9112 for (;;) 9113 { 9114 dp = readdir(dirp); 9115 if (dp == NULL) 9116 break; 9117 if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot) 9118 && vim_regexec(®match, (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0)) 9119 { 9120 STRCPY(s, dp->d_name); 9121 len = STRLEN(buf); 9122 9123 if (starstar && stardepth < 100) 9124 { 9125 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to 9126 * find matches. */ 9127 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**"); 9128 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end); 9129 ++stardepth; 9130 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE); 9131 --stardepth; 9132 } 9133 9134 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end); 9135 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */ 9136 { 9137 /* need to expand another component of the path */ 9138 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 9139 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE); 9140 } 9141 else 9142 { 9143 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */ 9144 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 9145 if (*path_end != NUL) 9146 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1); 9147 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */ 9148 { 9149 #ifdef MACOS_CONVERT 9150 size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1; 9151 char_u *precomp_buf = 9152 mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len); 9153 9154 if (precomp_buf) 9155 { 9156 mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len); 9157 vim_free(precomp_buf); 9158 } 9159 #endif 9160 addfile(gap, buf, flags); 9161 } 9162 } 9163 } 9164 } 9165 9166 closedir(dirp); 9167 } 9168 9169 vim_free(buf); 9170 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 9171 9172 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len; 9173 if (matches > 0) 9174 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches, 9175 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp); 9176 return matches; 9177 } 9178 #endif 9179 9180 /* 9181 * Generic wildcard expansion code. 9182 * 9183 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a 9184 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*" 9185 * 9186 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not 9187 * set, and "file" may contain an error message. 9188 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of 9189 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later. 9190 */ 9191 int 9192 gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags) 9193 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */ 9194 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */ 9195 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */ 9196 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */ 9197 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 9198 { 9199 int i; 9200 garray_T ga; 9201 char_u *p; 9202 static int recursive = FALSE; 9203 int add_pat; 9204 9205 /* 9206 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails, 9207 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always 9208 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise, 9209 * return FAIL. 9210 */ 9211 if (recursive) 9212 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR 9213 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 9214 #else 9215 return FAIL; 9216 #endif 9217 9218 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR 9219 /* 9220 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle 9221 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This 9222 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately. 9223 * For `=expr` do use the internal function. 9224 */ 9225 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++) 9226 { 9227 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL 9228 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 9229 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=') 9230 # endif 9231 ) 9232 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 9233 } 9234 #endif 9235 9236 recursive = TRUE; 9237 9238 /* 9239 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty. 9240 */ 9241 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30); 9242 9243 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i) 9244 { 9245 add_pat = -1; 9246 p = pat[i]; 9247 9248 #ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 9249 if (vim_backtick(p)) 9250 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags); 9251 else 9252 #endif 9253 { 9254 /* 9255 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/". 9256 */ 9257 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL) 9258 { 9259 p = expand_env_save_opt(p, TRUE); 9260 if (p == NULL) 9261 p = pat[i]; 9262 #ifdef UNIX 9263 /* 9264 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment 9265 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously 9266 * found file names and start all over again. 9267 */ 9268 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL) 9269 { 9270 vim_free(p); 9271 ga_clear_strings(&ga); 9272 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, 9273 flags); 9274 recursive = FALSE; 9275 return i; 9276 } 9277 #endif 9278 } 9279 9280 /* 9281 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to 9282 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add 9283 * the pattern. 9284 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or 9285 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given. 9286 */ 9287 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p)) 9288 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags); 9289 } 9290 9291 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND))) 9292 { 9293 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p); 9294 9295 #if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC) 9296 slash_to_colon(t); 9297 #endif 9298 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes 9299 * "vim c:/" work. */ 9300 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND) 9301 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE); 9302 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0) 9303 addfile(&ga, t, flags); 9304 vim_free(t); 9305 } 9306 9307 if (p != pat[i]) 9308 vim_free(p); 9309 } 9310 9311 *num_file = ga.ga_len; 9312 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)""; 9313 9314 recursive = FALSE; 9315 9316 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL; 9317 } 9318 9319 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 9320 9321 /* 9322 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here. 9323 */ 9324 static int 9325 vim_backtick(p) 9326 char_u *p; 9327 { 9328 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`'); 9329 } 9330 9331 /* 9332 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command. 9333 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `. 9334 * Returns number of file names found. 9335 */ 9336 static int 9337 expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags) 9338 garray_T *gap; 9339 char_u *pat; 9340 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 9341 { 9342 char_u *p; 9343 char_u *cmd; 9344 char_u *buffer; 9345 int cnt = 0; 9346 int i; 9347 9348 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */ 9349 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2); 9350 if (cmd == NULL) 9351 return 0; 9352 9353 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL 9354 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */ 9355 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p, TRUE); 9356 else 9357 #endif 9358 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL, 9359 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0); 9360 vim_free(cmd); 9361 if (buffer == NULL) 9362 return 0; 9363 9364 cmd = buffer; 9365 while (*cmd != NUL) 9366 { 9367 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */ 9368 p = cmd; 9369 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */ 9370 ++p; 9371 /* add an entry if it is not empty */ 9372 if (p > cmd) 9373 { 9374 i = *p; 9375 *p = NUL; 9376 addfile(gap, cmd, flags); 9377 *p = i; 9378 ++cnt; 9379 } 9380 cmd = p; 9381 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n')) 9382 ++cmd; 9383 } 9384 9385 vim_free(buffer); 9386 return cnt; 9387 } 9388 # endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */ 9389 9390 /* 9391 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags: 9392 * EW_DIR add directories 9393 * EW_FILE add files 9394 * EW_EXEC add executable files 9395 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist 9396 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name 9397 */ 9398 void 9399 addfile(gap, f, flags) 9400 garray_T *gap; 9401 char_u *f; /* filename */ 9402 int flags; 9403 { 9404 char_u *p; 9405 int isdir; 9406 9407 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */ 9408 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0) 9409 return; 9410 9411 #ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL 9412 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */ 9413 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL) 9414 return; 9415 #endif 9416 9417 isdir = mch_isdir(f); 9418 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE))) 9419 return; 9420 9421 /* If the file isn't executable, may not add it. Do accept directories. */ 9422 if (!isdir && (flags & EW_EXEC) && !mch_can_exe(f)) 9423 return; 9424 9425 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */ 9426 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL) 9427 return; 9428 9429 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir)); 9430 if (p == NULL) 9431 return; 9432 9433 STRCPY(p, f); 9434 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 9435 slash_adjust(p); 9436 #endif 9437 /* 9438 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present. 9439 */ 9440 #ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR 9441 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH)) 9442 add_pathsep(p); 9443 #endif 9444 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p; 9445 } 9446 #endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */ 9447 9448 #if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) 9449 9450 #ifndef SEEK_SET 9451 # define SEEK_SET 0 9452 #endif 9453 #ifndef SEEK_END 9454 # define SEEK_END 2 9455 #endif 9456 9457 /* 9458 * Get the stdout of an external command. 9459 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error. 9460 */ 9461 char_u * 9462 get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags) 9463 char_u *cmd; 9464 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */ 9465 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */ 9466 { 9467 char_u *tempname; 9468 char_u *command; 9469 char_u *buffer = NULL; 9470 int len; 9471 int i = 0; 9472 FILE *fd; 9473 9474 if (check_restricted() || check_secure()) 9475 return NULL; 9476 9477 /* get a name for the temp file */ 9478 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL) 9479 { 9480 EMSG(_(e_notmp)); 9481 return NULL; 9482 } 9483 9484 /* Add the redirection stuff */ 9485 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname); 9486 if (command == NULL) 9487 goto done; 9488 9489 /* 9490 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored). 9491 * Don't check timestamps here. 9492 */ 9493 ++no_check_timestamps; 9494 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags); 9495 --no_check_timestamps; 9496 9497 vim_free(command); 9498 9499 /* 9500 * read the names from the file into memory 9501 */ 9502 # ifdef VMS 9503 /* created temporary file is not always readable as binary */ 9504 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r"); 9505 # else 9506 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN); 9507 # endif 9508 9509 if (fd == NULL) 9510 { 9511 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname); 9512 goto done; 9513 } 9514 9515 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END); 9516 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */ 9517 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET); 9518 9519 buffer = alloc(len + 1); 9520 if (buffer != NULL) 9521 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd); 9522 fclose(fd); 9523 mch_remove(tempname); 9524 if (buffer == NULL) 9525 goto done; 9526 #ifdef VMS 9527 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */ 9528 #endif 9529 if (i != len) 9530 { 9531 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname); 9532 vim_free(buffer); 9533 buffer = NULL; 9534 } 9535 else 9536 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */ 9537 9538 done: 9539 vim_free(tempname); 9540 return buffer; 9541 } 9542 #endif 9543 9544 /* 9545 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion 9546 * functions. 9547 */ 9548 void 9549 FreeWild(count, files) 9550 int count; 9551 char_u **files; 9552 { 9553 if (count <= 0 || files == NULL) 9554 return; 9555 #if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */ 9556 /* 9557 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have 9558 * been used??? 9559 */ 9560 _fnexplodefree((char **)files); 9561 #else 9562 while (count--) 9563 vim_free(files[count]); 9564 vim_free(files); 9565 #endif 9566 } 9567 9568 /* 9569 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'. 9570 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping. 9571 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command. 9572 */ 9573 int 9574 goto_im() 9575 { 9576 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed()); 9577 } 9578